Home

Acronis Backup & Recovery 10 Workstation

1. BsXRS New Geata tote Bobs Type Oga pan M An AN an 3 Badin 5 20 2009 22348 Ide Bacup plan Local Cleanup task custom sc ide Comin lead EP toca mactere Machine 12 Of ferential backup Ide Gackup file Local Fa dbdup Ide Sodupe Loca Incremental becup Ide Badup Mie Local Task for validation after ide Validation w Local Task for vakdetion after Ide 0 Validation or Local ide Validation v Local Tasks view Common way of working with views Generally every view contains a table of items a table toolbar with buttons and the Information panel e Use filtering and sorting capabilities to search the table for the item in question e Inthe table select the desired item e Inthe Information panel collapsed by default view the item s details e Perform actions on the selected item There are several ways of performing the same action on selected items o By clicking the buttons on the table toolbar o By clicking in the items in the Item s name Actions bar on the Actions and Tools pane o By selecting the items in the Actions menu o By right clicking the item and selecting the operation in the context menu Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 11 Action pages An action page appears in the main area when clicking any action item in the Actions menu or in the Actions bar on the Actions and tools pane It contains steps you need to perform in order to create and launch any ta
2. n Fy Create bootable meds g Validate Ee Create personal vault DL Create Acronis Secure Zone icta Acror s components Run Acrores Recovery for Microsoft Exchange Rum Acrores Recovery for Microsoft SQL Server g Manze berses Tools Yo Using the maregeenert coreole A Create bootable media ua Ren Acronis Recovery for Mkrovelt SQL Server gz Q ret misgar Q Ky Install Aror Components od Run Acronis Recovery fee Microsalt Exchange g Ak katup show the Oashdoard mitesd of the arrert view Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console Welcome screen Key elements of the console workspace Name Description Navigation pane 2 Actions and tools pane Contains the Navigation tree and the Shortcuts bar and lets you navigate to the different views see the Navigation pane p 8 section Contains bars with a set of actions that can be performed and tools see the Actions and Tools pane p 9 section Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 7 Main area The main place of working where you create edit and manage backup plans policies tasks and perform other operations Displays the different views and action pages p 11 depending on items selected in the menu Navigation tree or on the Actions and Tools pane 4 Menu bar Appears across the top of the program window and lets you perform all the operations available on both panes Menu items change dynamically
3. By path C Finance test log Excludes the file named test log located in the folder c Finance Mask Excludes all files with the log extension Mask my log Excludes all log files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my The above settings are not effective for the files or folders that were explicitly selected for backup For example assume that you selected the folder MyFolder and the file MyFile tmp outside that folder and selected to skip all tmp files In this case all tmp files in the folder MyFolder will be skipped during the backup process but the file MyFile tmp will not be skipped 3 3 1 3 Pre Post commands This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and PE based bootable media The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after the backup procedure 52 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 The following scheme illustrates when pre post commands are executed Pre backup Post backup command command Examples of how you can use the pre post commands e delete some temporary files from the disk before starting backup e configure a third party antivirus product to be started each time before the backup starts e copy an archive to another location after the backup ends The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause To specify pre post command
4. e Perform file level backup and recovery of the files that the user has permissions to access but without using a file level backup snapshot e Create backup plans and tasks and manage them e View but not manage backup plans and tasks created by other users e View the local event log Administrative users A user who has administrative privileges on the machine such as a member of the Administrators or Backup Operators group additionally has the following management rights e Back up and recover the entire machine or any data on the machine with or without using a disk snapshot Members of the Administrators group also can e View and manage backup plans and tasks owned by any user on the machine 2 4 Owners and credentials This section explains the concept of owner and the meaning of a backup plan s or task s credentials Plan task owner A local backup plan owner is the user who created or last modified the plan A centralized backup plan owner is the management server administrator who created or last modified the centralized policy that spawned the plan Tasks belonging to a backup plan either local or centralized are owned by the backup plan owner Tasks that do not belong to a backup plan such as the recovery task are owned by the user who has created or last modified the task Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 23 Managing a plan task owned by another user Having Administrator privileges
5. 2 In the Machine name field enter the name of the machine to which notifications will be sent Multiple names are not supported Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows o When backup completes successfully to send notification when the backup operation is completed successfully o When backup fails to send notification when the backup operation is failed The When user interaction is required check box to send notification during the operation when user interaction is required is always selected Click Send test WinPopup message to check if the settings are correct 3 3 1 11 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events of the backup operations performed on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 61 The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to log the backup operations events in the A
6. Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 141 To specify credentials 1 2 Select one of the following o Use the task credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section o Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 3 6 Destination selection Specify the destination the selected data will be recovered to 6 3 6 1 Disks Available disk destinations depend on the agents operating on the machine Recover to 142 Physical machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected disks will be recovered to the physical disks of the machine the console is connected to On selecting this you pr
7. Description Offer Comment Q Failed tasks X Resolve Resolve will open the Backup plans and Tasks view with failed tasks where you can examine the reason of failure Q Tasks that need Resolve Each time a task needs human interaction the Dashboard interaction X shows a message to inform you what action has to be performed for example insert new CD or Stop Retry Ignore on an error Q Trial version of product Connect Once the trial version of the product is installed the expires in X day s program starts the countdown of days remaining until the trial period expires Q Trial period is over Start Connect 15 day trial period has expired Enter a full license key the installer and enter a full license key Q Vaults with low free View vaults View vaults will take you to the Vaults view where you space X can examine the vault size free space content and take the necessary steps to increase the free space Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 101 A Bootable media was not Create now To be able to recover an operating system when the created machine fails to boot you must 1 Back up the system volume and the boot volume if it is different 2 Create at least one bootable media p 209 Create now will launch the Bootable Media Builder p 216 A No backups have been Back up now The Dashboard warns you that no data was backed up on created for X days the machine for a relatively long period of time Back up now will t
8. Specifies the name of the log Select the name of a standard log Application Security or System from the list or type a log name for example Microsoft Office Sessions Event source Specifies the event source which typically indicates the program or the system component that caused the event for example disk Event type Specifies the event type Error Warning Information Audit success or Audit failure Event ID Specifies the event number which typically identifies the particular kind of events among events from the same source For example an Error event with Event source disk and EventID 7 occurs when Windows discovers a bad block on a disk whereas an Error event with Event source disk and Event ID 15 occurs when a disk is not ready for access yet Examples Bad block emergency backup One or more bad blocks that have suddenly appeared on a hard disk usually indicate that the hard disk drive will soon fail Suppose that you want to create a backup plan that will back up hard disk data as soon as such a situation occurs Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 95 When Windows detects a bad block on a hard disk it records an event with the event source disk and the event number 7 into the System log the type of this event is Error When creating the plan type or select the following in the Schedule area e Log name System e Event source disk e Event type Error e Event ID 7 Important To ensure that such
9. Having connected the console to the management server the administrator sets up and manages backup policies p 208 and accesses other management server functionality that is performs centralized management p 210 Using the direct console agent connection the administrator performs direct management p 212 Consolidation Combining two or more subsequent backups p 207 belonging to the same archive p 207 into a single backup Consolidation might be needed when deleting backups either manually or during cleanup p 211 For example the retention rules require to delete a full backup p 214 that has expired but retain the next incremental p 215 one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated with the incremental backup s date Since consolidation may take a lot of time and system resources retention rules provide an option to not delete backups with dependencies In our example the full backup will be retained until the incremental one also becomes obsolete Then both backups will be deleted D Deduplicating vault A managed vault p 215 in which deduplication p 211 is enabled Deduplication A method of storing different duplicates of the same information only once Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can apply the deduplication technology to backup archives p 207 stored on storage nodes p 217 This minimizes storage space taken by the archives backup traffic and network usag
10. S Scheduling 67 87 126 135 160 Select destination disks 200 201 Select the type of volume being created 200 201 Selecting a host that will perform conversion 118 119 136 Selecting disks and volumes 120 Selecting files and folders 121 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Selecting source and target disks 193 Selection rule 208 217 Set active volume 198 203 Set the volume options 201 Set the volume size 201 202 Setting up a conversion schedule 118 135 Setting up a display mode 184 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual machine 135 Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine 48 Simple scheme 126 SNMP notifications 47 51 62 72 76 Source files exclusion 49 51 Source type 113 117 120 Startup page 44 Static group 210 217 Storage node Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node 210 211 214 216 217 218 Storage node side cleanup 216 217 218 Storage node side validation 216 217 218 Supported file systems 15 Supported operating systems 15 T Tape compatibility table 36 Tape support 36 Task 17 208 210 215 218 Task credentials 139 156 157 165 166 Task details e 103 107 111 Task failure handling 50 67 Task start conditions 50 66 88 97 105 Task states 103 105 Task statuses 103 106 Tasks need interaction 102 Technical support 16 Copyright Acr
11. 2 9 2 9 1 2 9 2 2 10 2 10 1 2 10 2 2 10 3 2 10 4 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Introducing Acronis Backup amp ReEcovery 10 cccccsssssssssssecccesserssssssseseessenesssesees 6 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 OVErVICW cececeessssscececeeeesesnsaeeeeecesseseasaeeeeecessessaasaeeeesens 6 Getting started eien ee aaee deVeutevken a aa a ariaa ae aaa aaa a iaaiaee 6 Using the management console ccccscsscsscssessessessssessescsecssesesssssesecsecsecsessesaessessseaeseseseeeseessesausaseasseseess 7 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components ssssssesssssesssereerrssssererrrssssssrrernrssssssreeeness 13 Agent for WINdOWS aecnsinroninisna iire ii ia aaa E i REPI e 13 Bootable components and media builder ceccscesceseescseessesesscescsscsecseeseesessessesseseceecseesesseesesaesaeeesoeees 14 Management Console E 15 SUpportedioperating sysStems reire erer Se eh ee ees 15 SUpported filesystems ronki an a R eee Bae ated sab eM ieee ease ese 15 Hardware require Ment cccsessscccccecsssessaesececsceeseeaaecececeseeseaeaeeeesessseauaeseseeseesseseaaeas 16 WeECHNIGAlSUPPONt PAET EE ds seta ceesea Geese eden secs toate de se E tebe ea naan ee EEN 16 Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 ssccccssssceccsssssccesssssccesssseeeeeees 17 Basic CONCEPTS eiai tA ecto he ee ed ee ee en es 17 Full incremental an
12. 3 10 182 Get the Bart PE builder Install Bootable Media Builder from the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 setup file Change the current folder to the folder where the Acronis Plug in for WinPE is installed by default If the plug in is installed in a folder other than the default folder change the path accordingly check the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Acronis Bootable Components Settings WinPE for the plug in location Run the following command export_license bat Copy the contents of the current folder by default C Program Files Acronis Bootable Components WinPE to the BartPE folder plugins Acronis Insert your Windows distribution CD if you do not have a copy of Windows installation files on the HDD Start the Bart PE builder Specify the path to the Windows installation files or Windows distribution CD Click Plugins and check whether the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 plug in is enabled Enable if disabled Specify the output folder and the full path to the resulting ISO file including the file name or the media to create Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 11 Build the Bart PE 12 Burn the ISO to CD or DVD if this has not been done yet or copy to a flash drive Once the machine boots into the Bart PE and you configure the network connection select Go gt System gt Storage gt Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 to start 6 10 2 Connecting to a machine booted from me
13. Normally only sectors that contain data are copied Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides an option to take a raw image that is copy all the disk sectors which enables imaging of unsupported file systems Disk group A number of dynamic disks p 213 that store the common configuration data in their LDM databases and therefore can be managed as a whole Normally all dynamic disks created within the same machine p 215 are members of the same disk group As soon as the first dynamic disk is created by the LDM or another disk management tool the disk group name can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services dmio Boot Info Primary Disk Group Name The next created or imported disks are added to the same disk group The group exists until at least one of its members exists Once the last dynamic disk is disconnected or converted to basic the group is discontinued though its name is kept in the above registry key In case a dynamic disk is created or connected again a disk group with an incremental name is created When moved to another machine a disk group is considered as foreign and cannot be used until imported into the existing disk group The import updates the configuration data on both the local 212 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 and the foreign disks so that they form a single entity A foreign group is imported as is will have the original name if no disk group exists
14. You can run Acronis Disk Director Lite on a bare metal on a machine that cannot boot or on a non Windows machine To do so boot the machine from a bootable media p 209 created with the Acronis Bootable Media Builder run the management console and then click Disk Management 6 11 3 Choosing the operating system for disk management On a machine with two or more operating systems representation of disks and volumes depends on which operating system is currently running A volume may have a different letter in different Windows operating systems For example volume E might appear as D or L when you boot another Windows operating system installed on the same machine It is also possible that this volume will have the same letter E under any Windows OS installed on the machine A dynamic disk created in one Windows operating system is considered as a Foreign Disk in another Windows operating system or might be unsupported by this operating system When you need to perform a disk management operation on such machine it is necessary to specify for which operating system the disk layout will be displayed and the disk management operation will be performed The name of the currently selected operating system is shown on the console toolbar after The current disk layout is for Click the OS name to select another operating system in the Operating System Selection window Under bootable media this window appears after clicking Disk
15. and so on The roll back period shows how many days we are guaranteed to have even in the worst case For a four level scheme it is four days Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 131 6 2 9 6 Custom backup scheme At a glance e Custom schedule and conditions for backups of each type e Custom schedule and retention rules Parameters Parameter Full backup Incremental Differential Clean up archive 132 Meaning Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a full backup For example the full backup can be set up to run every Sunday at 1 00 AM as soon as all users are logged off Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform an incremental backup If the archive contains no backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the incremental backup Specifies on what schedule and under which conditions to perform a differential backup If the archive contains no full backups at the time of the task run a full backup is created instead of the differential backup Specifies how to get rid of old backups either to apply retention rules p 31 regularly or clean up the archive during a backup when the destination location runs out of space By default the retention rules are not specified which means older backups will not be deleted automatically Using retention rules Specify the retention rules and when to apply them This setting
16. but the default method of cloning will be carried out with proportional enlargement of all the source disk volumes so that no unallocated space remains on the target disk If the destination is smaller then the As is option of cloning will be unavailable and proportional resizing of the source disk volumes will be mandatory The program analyzes the target disk to establish whether its size will be sufficient to hold all the data from the source disk without any loss If such transfer with proportional resizing of the source disk volumes is possible but without any data loss then the user will be allowed to proceed If due to the size limitations safe transfer of all the source disk data to the target disk is impossible even with the proportional resizing of the volumes then the Clone basic disk operation will be impossible and the user will not be able to continue If you are about to clone a disk comprising of a system volume pay attention to the Advanced options By clicking Finish you ll add the pending operation of the disk cloning To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 205 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Using advanced options When cloning a disk comprising of a system volume you need to retain an operating system bootability on the target disk volume It means that the operating system must have the system volume information e g volume lette
17. driver and network adapter driver s 150 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 If the drivers are on a vendor s disc or other removable media turn on the Search removable media If the drivers are located in a networked folder or on the bootable media specify the path to the folder in the Search folder field During recovery Universal Restore will perform the recursive search in all the sub folders of the specified folder find the most suitable HAL and HDD controller drivers of all those available and install them into the recovered system Universal Restore also searches for the network adapter driver the path to the found driver is then transmitted by Universal Restore to the operating system If the hardware has multiple network interface cards Universal Restore will try to configure all the cards drivers In case Universal Restore cannot find a compatible driver in the specified locations it will specify the problem device and ask for a disc or a network path to the driver Once Windows boots it will initialize the standard procedure for installing new hardware The network adapter driver will be installed silently if the driver has the Microsoft Windows signature Otherwise Windows will ask for confirmation whether to install the unsigned driver After that you will be able to configure the network connection and specify drivers for the video adapter USB and other devices Mass storage drivers to install anyway To a
18. new value will be used by default in all recovery tasks you will create later on this machine To view and change the default recovery options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default recovery options from the top menu Availability of the recovery options The set of available recovery options depends on 70 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 e The environment the agent operates in Windows bootable media e The type of data being recovered disk file e The operating system being recovered from the disk backup The following table summarizes the availability of the recovery options Agent for Windows Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk File Disk File recovery recovery recovery recovery also from a also from a disk disk backup backup Pre Post recovery PE only PE only commands p 72 Recovery priority p 73 2 3 File level security p 74 Recover files with their P security settings Error handling p 77 Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode Re attempt if an error occurs Additional settings p 78 Set current date and time A for recovered files Validate backup archive before recovery Check file system after z z recovery Reboot machine Z 2 automatically if it is required for recovery Change SID after recovery Windows A Windows 2
19. nodma Disables direct memory access DMA for all IDE hard disk drives Prevents the kernel from freezing on some hardware nofw Disables the FireWire IEEE1394 interface support nopcmcia Disables detection of PCMCIA hardware nomouse Disables mouse support module_name off Disables the module whose name is given by module_name For example to disable the use of the SATA module specify sata_sis off pci bios Forces the use of PCI BIOS instead of accessing the hardware device directly You may want to use this parameter if the machine has a non standard PCI host bridge pci nobios Disables the use of PCI BIOS only direct hardware access methods will be allowed You may want to use this parameter when the bootable media fails to start which may be caused by the BIOS pci biosirq Uses PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt routing table You may want to use this parameter if the kernel is unable to allocate interrupt requests IRQs or discover secondary PCI buses on the motherboard These calls might not work properly on some machines But this may be the only way to get the interrupt routing table Network settings While creating Acronis bootable media you have an option to pre configure network connections that will be used by the bootable agent The following parameters can be pre configured e P address 178 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 e Subnet mask e Gateway e DNS server e WINS server Once t
20. p 49 will be used After any of the settings is changed against the default value a new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Custom Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears and so you always see only the settings that differ from the default values in this section of the Create backup plan page To reset all the settings to the default values click Reset to default Convert to VM Applies to Disk volume backup backup of Entire virtual machines or Volumes of a virtual machine Not available on machines running Linux By setting up regular conversion you obtain a copy of your server or workstation on a virtual machine which can be readily powered on in case the original machine fails The conversion can be performed by the same agent that performs the backup or by an agent installed on another machine If the latter is the case you need to store the archive in a shared location such as a network folder or a managed vault so that the other machine can access the archive When to convert p 135 Optional Specify whether to convert every full every incremental or every differential backup or convert the last created backup on schedule Specify the conversion schedule if required Host p 136 118 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Specify the mach
21. power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in bootability loss In contrast to Windows Disk Manager the program ensures bootability of an offline operating system on the disk after the operation 6 11 5 6 Disk conversion dynamic to basic You would want to convert dynamic disks back to basic ones e g if you want to start using an OS on your machine that does not support dynamic disks If you need to convert a dynamic disk to basic 1 Select the dynamic disk to convert to basic 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to basic in the context menu You will receive a final warning about the dynamic disk being converted to basic You will be advised about the changes that will happen to the system if the chosen disk is converted from dynamic into basic E g if such a conversion will stop the disk from being accessed by the system the operating system will stop loading after such conversion or if the disk you want to convert to basic contains any volumes of the types that are only supported by dynamic disks all volume types except Simple volumes then you will be warned here about the possible damage to the data involved in the conversion Please note the operation is unavailable for a dynamic disk containing Spanned Striped or RAID 5 volumes 3 If you click OK in this warning window the conversion will be performed immedi
22. the validation task fails and the backup plan gets the Error status To set up validation specify the following parameters 1 When to validate select when to perform the validation As the validation is a resource intensive operation it makes sense to schedule the validation to the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if the validation is a major part of your data protection strategy and you prefer to be immediately informed whether the backed up data is not corrupted and can be successfully recovered think of starting the validation right after backup creation 2 What to validate select either to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Validation of the archive will validate all the archive s backups and may take a long time and a lot of system resources 3 Validation schedule appears only if you have selected the on schedule in step 1 set the schedule of validation For more information see the Scheduling p 87 section 6 2 11 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual machine When creating a backup plan p 116 you can set up regular conversion of a disk or volume backup to a virtual machine This section provides information that helps you make the appropriate settings 6 2 11 1 Sett
23. without prompting user for confirmation Dismount media after backup is finished Ask for first media while creating backup archives on removable media Validate backup after creation Reset archive bit 50 Dest HDD Dest network share Dest removable media Dest local Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest HDD Dest network share Dest removable media Dest local Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest HDD Dest network share Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media Dest HDD Dest network share Dest Tape Dest removable media Dest removable media Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Reboot after the backup Notifications E mail p 60 4 2 z Win Pop up p 61 Z 2 Event tracing Windows events log p 61 7 a SNMP p 62 i x Jld Archive protection This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for both disk level and file level backup The preset is Disabled To protect the archive from unauthorized access 1 Select the Set password for the archive check box 2 Inthe Enter the password field type a password 3 Inthe Confirm the password field re type the password 4 Select one of the following o Do not encrypt the archive will be protected with the password only o
24. 00 PM 4 Effective From empty To empty This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The Last day of every month schedule is added to the full backups while the differential backups are scheduled to be performed once a week and incremental on workdays For more details see the Monthly full weekly differential and daily incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 132 section Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 93 Season schedule Run the task on all workdays during the northern autumn seasons of 2009 and 2010 During a workday the task is performed every 6 hours from 12 AM midnight till 6 PM The schedule s parameters are set up as follows 1 Months September October November 2 On lt all gt lt workdays gt 3 Every 6 hours From 12 00 00 AM Until 06 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 08 30 2009 Actually the task will be started on the first workday of September By setting up this date we just define that the task must be started in 2009 To 12 01 2010 Actually the task will end on the last workday of November By setting up this date we just define that the task must be discontinued in 2010 after autumn ends in the northern hemisphere Several monthly schedules for one task In the case when the task needs to be run on different days or weeks with different time intervals depending on the month consider adding a dedicated schedule to every desi
25. 1024x768 or higher display resolution is required for comfortable work with the management console LoL Navigation pane The navigation pane includes the Navigation tree and the Shortcuts bar Navigation tree The Navigation tree enables you to navigate across the program views Views depend on whether the console is connected to a managed machine or to the management server Views for a managed machine When the console is connected to a managed machine the following views are available in the navigation tree 2 Machine name Root of the tree also called a Welcome view Displays the name of the machine the console is currently connected to Use this view for quick access to the main operations available on the managed machine o Q Dashboard Use this view to estimate at a glance whether the data is successfully protected on the managed machine o e Backup plans and tasks Use this view to manage backup plans and tasks on the managed machine run edit stop and delete plans and tasks view their states and statuses monitor plans o amp Vaults Use this view to manage personal vaults and archives stored in there add new vaults rename and delete the existing ones validate vaults explore backup content mount backups as virtual drives etc o Log Use this view to examine information on operations performed by the program on the managed machine o Disk management Use this view to perform operations on the machine s ha
26. 2000 2009 107 Stop a plan task Backup plan Click i Stop Stopping the running backup plan stops all its tasks Thus all the task operations will be aborted Task Click lan Stop What will happen if I stop the task Generally stopping the task aborts its operation backup recovery validation exporting conversion migration The task enters the Stopping state first then becomes Idle The task schedule if created remains valid To complete the operation you will have to run the task over again recovery task from the disk backup The target volume will be deleted and its space unallocated you will get the same result if the recovery is unsuccessful To recover the lost volume you will have to run the task once again e recovery task from the file backup The aborted operation may cause changes in the destination folder Some files may be recovered but some not depending on the moment when you stopped the task To recover all the files you will have to run the task once again 108 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Edit a plan task Backup plan Click Edit Backup plan editing is performed in the same way as creation p 116 except for the following limitations It is not always possible to use all scheme options when editing a backup plan if the created archive is not empty i e contains backups 1 It is not possible to change the scheme to Grandfather Father Son or Tower of Hanoi 2 If the
27. 215 Storage node enables the administrator to e relieve managed machines p 215 of unnecessary CPU load by using the storage node side cleanup p 218 and storage node side validation p 218 e drastically reduce backup traffic and storage space taken by the archives p 207 by using deduplication p 211 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 217 e prevent access to the backup archives even in case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by a malefactor by using encrypted vaults p 214 Storage node side cleanup Cleanup p 211 performed by a storage node p 217 according to the backup plans p 208 that produce the archives p 207 stored in a managed vault p 215 Being an alternative to the agent side cleanup p 207 the cleanup on the storage node side relieves the production servers of unnecessary CPU load Since the cleanup schedule exists on the machine p 215 the agent p 207 resides on and therefore uses the machine s time and events the agent has to initiate the storage node side cleanup every time the scheduled time or event comes To do so the agent must be online The following table summarizes the cleanup types used in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Cleanup Storage node side Schedule set by Backup plan Backup plan Retention rules set by Backup plan Backup plan Storage node side validation Validation p 219 performed by a storage node p 217 according to the backup plans
28. 3 Run the console To be able to recover the machine s operating system if the system fails to start create bootable media p 209 4 Connect the console to the managed machine 5 Create a backup plan p 208 To do so you have to specify at the very least the data to be protected and the location where the backup archive p 207 will be stored This will create a minimal backup plan consisting of one task p 218 that will create a full backup p 207 of your data every time the task is manually started A complex backup plan might consist of multiple tasks which run on schedule create full incremental or differential backups p 21 perform archive maintenance operations such as backup validation p 219 or deleting outdated backups archive cleanup p 211 You can customize backup operations using various backup options such as pre post backup commands network bandwidth throttling error handling or notification options 6 Use the Backup plans and tasks page to view information about your backup plans and tasks and monitor their execution Use the Log page to browse the operations log 7 The location where you store backup archives is called a vault p 219 Navigate to the Vaults page to view information about your vaults Navigate further to the specific vault to view archives and backups and perform manual operations with them mounting validating deleting viewing contents You can also select a backup to recover d
29. 6 7 2 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree o Ifthe archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault o Ifthe archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault o Ifthe archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts o Ifthe archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted ona mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself o Ifthe archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP 166 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 After entering access credentials the folders on the server become availab
30. 83 Messenger service WinPopup 51 61 71 75 Monthly schedule 92 130 Mounting an image 160 Multi volume snapshot 49 57 N Network connection speed 50 59 Network port 176 179 Network settings 176 178 Notifications 60 74 NT signature 143 144 Number of tasks 45 O Operations with archives stored in a vault 81 82 84 Operations with backups 81 82 85 Operations with panes 10 Options 44 Overwriting 149 Owners and credentials 23 81 139 157 166 P Password for Acronis Secure Zone 170 171 Pending operations 191 193 194 195 196 203 204 205 224 Personal vault e 206 212 216 Personal vaults 39 81 Physical machine 210 216 Plan 217 Policy 217 Pop up messages 44 Post backup command 54 Post data capture command 55 Post recovery command 73 Pre Post commands 49 52 54 71 72 Pre Post data capture commands 49 54 57 Pre backup command 53 Pre data capture command 55 Pre recovery command 72 Proprietary Acronis technologies 38 R Recovering data 85 107 137 152 Recovering MD devices and logical volumes 70 186 Recovery point 215 217 218 Recovery priority 71 73 Registered machine 45 210 216 217 Registration 217 Result confirmation 170 171 Retention rules 31 126 132 133 134 211 Run backup plan 107 111 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite 191
31. AES 128 the archive will be encrypted using the Advanced Standard Encryption AES algorithm with a 128 bit key o AES 192 the archive will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 192 bit key o AES 256 the archive will be encrypted using the AES algorithm with a 256 bit key 5 Click OK The AES cryptographic algorithm operates in the Cipher block chaining CBC mode and uses a randomly generated key with a user defined size of 128 192 or 256 bits The larger the key size the longer it will take for the program to encrypt the archive and the more secure your data will be The encryption key is then encrypted with AES 256 using a SHA 256 hash of the password as a key The password itself is not stored anywhere on the disk or in the backup file the password hash is used for verification purposes With this two level security the backup data is protected from any unauthorized access but recovering a lost password is not possible 3 3 1 2 Source files exclusion This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for disk level backup of NTFS and FAT file systems only This option is effective for file level backup of all supported file systems Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 51 The option defines which files and folders to skip during the backup process and thus exclude from the list of backed up items The preset is Exclude files matching the following criteri
32. Inc 2000 2009 By clicking OK in the Delete volume window you ll add the pending operation of volume deletion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 205 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them 6 11 6 3 Set active volume If you have several primary volumes you must specify one to be the boot volume For this you can set a volume to become active A disk can have only one active volume so if you set a volume as active the volume which was active before will be automatically unset If you need to set a volume active 1 Select a primary volume on a basic MBR disk to set as active 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Mark as active in the context menu If there is no other active volume in the system the pending operation of setting active volume will be added Please note that due to setting the new active volume the former active volume letter might be changed and some of the installed programs might stop running 3 If another active volume is present in the system you will receive the warning that the previous active volume will have to be set passive first By clicking OK in the Warning window you ll add the pending operation of setting active volume Please note even if you have the Operating System on the new active volume in some cases the machine will not be able to boot from it You will have to confirm your decision
33. NTFS or to leave the volume Unformatted In setting the cluster size you can choose between any number in the preset amount for each file system Note the program suggests the cluster size best suited to the volume with the chosen file system If you are creating a basic volume which can be made into a system volume this page will be different giving you the opportunity to select the volume Type Primary Active Primary or Logical Typically Primary is selected to install an operating system to a volume Select the Active default value if you want to install an operating system on this volume to boot at machine startup If the Primary button is not selected the Active option will be inactive If the volume is intended for data storage select Logical A Basic disk can contain up to four primary volumes If they already exist the disk will have to be converted into dynamic otherwise or Active and Primary options will be disabled and you will only be able to select the Logical volume type The warning message will advise you that an OS installed on this volume will not be bootable If you use characters when setting a new volume label that are unsupported by the currently installed operation system you will get the appropriate warning and the Next button will be disabled You will have to change the label to proceed with the creation of the new volume If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Set the vo
34. Recovery Manager using F11 e the backup image is located in Acronis Secure Zone e you have chosen to use Acronis Active Restore p 206 because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Preparation Before recovering Windows to dissimilar hardware make sure that you have the drivers for the new HDD controller and the chipset These drivers are critical to start the operating system Use the CD or DVD supplied by the hardware vendor or download the drivers from the vendor s Web site The driver files should have the inf sys or oem extensions If you download the drivers in the exe cab or zip format extract them using a third party application such as WinRAR http www rarlab com or Universal Extractor http legroom net software uniextract The best practice is to store drivers for all the hardware used in your organization in a single repository sorted by device type or by the hardware configurations You can keep a copy of the repository on a DVD or a flash drive pick some drivers and add them to the bootable media create the custom bootable media with the necessary drivers and the necessary network configuration for each of your servers Or you can simply specify the path to the repository every time Universal Restore is used Universal Restore settings Automatic driver search Specify where the program will search for the Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL HDD controller
35. The environment the agent operates in Windows bootable media e The type of the data being backed up disk file e The backup destination networked location or local disk e The backup scheme Back up now or using the scheduler The following table summarizes the availability of the backup options Agent for Windows Bootable media Linux based or PE based Disk backup File backup Disk backup File backup Archive protection p 51 password encryption Source files exclusion p 51 Pre Post backup commands m PE only PE only p 52 Pre Post data capture commands p 54 Multi volume snapshot p 7 7 57 File level backup snapshot 7 p 56 Use VSS p 57 m p Compression level p 58 Backup performance Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 49 Backup priority p 58 HDD writing speed p 59 Network connection speed p 59 Fast incremental differential backup p 63 Backup splitting p 63 File level security p 64 Preserve files security settings in archives In archives store encrypted files in decrypted state Media components p 64 Error handling p 65 Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode Re attempt if an error occurs Ignore bad sectors Dual destination p 66 Task start conditions p 66 Task failure handling p 67 Additional settings p 68 Overwrite data on a tape
36. The preset is Disabled To configure e mail notification 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box to activate notifications 2 In the E mail addresses field type the e mail address to which notifications will be sent You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons 3 Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows o When backup completes successfully to send a notification when the backup task has completed successfully o When backup fails to send a notification when the backup task has failed The When user interaction is required check box is always selected 4 For the e mail message to include the log entries related to the backup select the Add full log to the notification check box 5 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure additional e mail parameters as follows then click OK o From type the e mail address of the user from whom the message will be sent If you leave this field empty messages will be constructed as if they are from the destination address o Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection o Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings e Incoming mail server
37. The program displays the total space available for the Acronis Secure Zone 2 If you need to allocate more space for the zone you can select volumes from which free space can be taken Again the program displays the total space available for the Acronis Secure Zone depending on your selection You will be able to set the exact zone size in the Acronis Secure Zone Size p 170 window 3 Click OK 6 8 1 2 Acronis Secure Zone Size Enter the Acronis Secure Zone size or drag the slider to select any size between the minimum and the maximum ones The minimum size is approximately 50MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space on all the volumes you have selected in the previous step If you have to take space from the boot or the system volume please bear the following in mind e Moving or resizing of the volume from which the system is currently booted will require a reboot 170 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 e Taking all free space from a system volume may cause the operating system to work unstably and even fail to start Do not set the maximum zone size if the boot or the system volume is selected 6 8 1 3 Password for Acronis Secure Zone Setting up a password protects the Acronis Secure Zone from unauthorized access The program will ask for the password at any operation relating to the zone and the archives located there such as data b
38. a task will complete despite the presence of bad blocks you must make the task ignore bad blocks To do this in Backup options go to Error handling and then select the Ignore bad sectors check box Pre update backup in Vista Suppose that you want to create a backup plan that will automatically perform a backup of the system for example by backing up the volume where Windows is installed every time that Windows is about to install updates Having downloaded one or more updates and scheduled their installation the Microsoft Windows Vista operating system records an event with the event source Milicrosoft Windows WindowsUpdateClient and event number 18 into the System log the type of this event is Information When creating the plan type or select the following in the Schedule area e Log name System e Event source Microsoft Windows WindowsUpdateClient e Event type Information e EventID 18 Tip To set up a similar backup plan for machines running Microsoft Windows XP replace the text in Event source with Windows Update Agent and leave the remaining fields the same How to view events in Event viewer To open a log in Event Viewer 1 Onthe Desktop or in the Start menu right click My Computer and then click Manage 2 Inthe Computer Management console expand System Tools and then expand Event Viewer 3 In Event Viewer click the name of a log that you want to view for example Application Note To be able to open
39. a time interval counted back from the moment when the retention rules are applied Every time a retention rule is applied the program calculates the date and time in the past corresponding to this interval and deletes all backups created before that moment None of the backups created after this moment will be deleted Retention rule is applied delete not delete 2 Keep the archive size within This is the maximum size of the archive Every time a retention rule is applied the program compares the actual archive size with the value you set and deletes the oldest backups to keep the archive size within this value The diagram below shows the archive content before and after the deletion Archive Archive F Backup 3 Backup 3 F Backup 4 Backup 4 F Backup 5 Maximum size Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 31 There is a certain risk that all but one backup will be deleted if the maximum archive size is set improperly too small or a regular backup turns out to be too large To protect the recent backups from deletion select the Never delete backups younger than check box and specify the maximum age of backups that must be retained The diagram below illustrates the resulting rule Retention rule 2 is applied Never delete lt backups younger than l l Delete if the maximum archive size is exceeded Do not delete Combination of rules 1 and 2 You can limit both the
40. all events information warnings and errors o Errors and warnings o Errors only e Do not log to disable logging events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events of the recovery operations to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 string identifying the type of event Information Warning Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 string containing the text description of the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in its log 76 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to send the recovery operations events to the SNMP managers Choose one of the following e Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options p 46 e Send SNMP notifications individually for recovery operation events to send the events of the
41. also be accessed in the respective menu items A menu item appears on the menu bar when you select an item in any of the navigation views ault 15 actions R WF validate Log R ER Delete view details Explore Ea Save selected to file archive 1 actions A B Create H Save all to file Validate Create Acronis Secure Zone Clear log x Delete 4 Refresh Refresh G Refresh Examples of Item name actions bars Actions Contains a list of common operations that can be performed on a managed machine or on a management server Always the same for all views Clicking the operation opens the respective action page see the Action pages p 12 section All the actions can also be accessed in the Actions menu Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 9 Actions R Q Backup Recover W Validate Ba Create personal location Create 452 continue Actions R Mount image Create backup policy Q Manage mounted images S Add centralized location is Actions bar on a managed machine and on a management server Tools Contains a list of the Acronis tools Always the same across all the program views All the tools can also be accessed in the Tools menu Tools R EB Create bootable media EA Install Acronis components Tools bar Help Contains a list of help topics Different views and action pages of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provi
42. also be booted into the above environments using the network boot from Acronis PXE Server or Microsoft Remote Installation Service RIS These servers with uploaded bootable components can also be thought of as a kind of bootable media Bootable media is most often used to e recover an operating system that cannot start e access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system e deploy an operating system on bare metal e create basic or dynamic volumes p 214 on bare metal e back up sector by sector a disk that has an unsupported file system e back up offline any data that cannot be backed up online because of restricted access being permanently locked by the running applications or for any other reason Built in group A group of machines that always exists on a management server p 216 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 209 A management server has two built in groups that contain all machines of each type All physical machines p 216 All virtual machines p 219 Built in groups cannot be deleted moved to other groups or manually modified Custom groups cannot be created within built in groups There is no way to remove a physical machine from the built in group except for deleting the machine from the management server Virtual machines are deleted as a result of their host server deletion A backup policy p 208 can be applied to a built in group C Centralized backup plan A backup plan p
43. also start the task The task will run under this person s credentials The task will always run under the same credentials regardless of the user who actually starts the task if you specify the task credentials explicitly To do so on the plan task creation page 1 Select the Advanced view check box 2 Select General gt Plan s Task credentials gt Change 3 Enter the credentials under which the plan task will run Scheduled or postponed start The plan task credentials are mandatory If you skip the credentials step you will be asked for credentials after finishing the plan task creation Why does the program compel me to specify credentials A scheduled or postponed task has to run anyway regardless if any user is logged on or not for example the system is at the Windows Welcome screen or a user other than the task owner is logged on It is sufficient that the machine be on that is not in standby or hibernate at the scheduled task start time That s why the Acronis scheduler needs the explicitly specified credentials to be able to start the task 24 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 2 5 GFS backup scheme This section covers implementation of the Grandfather Father Son GFS backup scheme in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 With this backup scheme you are not allowed to back up more often than once a day The scheme enables you to mark out the daily weekly and monthly cycles in your daily backup sc
44. and you will be able to mount the resulting disk backup and extract valid files to another disk 3 3 1 17 Dual destination This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems when the primary backup destination is a local folder or Acronis Secure Zone and the secondary destination is another local folder or network share Managed vaults and FTP servers are not supported as secondary destinations The preset is Disabled When dual destination is enabled the agent will automatically copy each backup being created locally to the secondary destination such as a network share Once the backup to the primary destination is completed the agent compares the updated archive contents to the secondary archive contents and copies to the secondary destination all backups that are missing there along with the new backup This option enables quick machine backup to the internal drive as an intermediate step before saving the ready backup on the network This comes in handy in cases of slow or busy networks and time consuming backup procedures Disconnection during the copy transfer will not affect the backup operation as opposed to backing up directly to the remote location Other advantages e Replication enhances the archive reliability e Roaming users can back up their portable computers to Acronis Secure Zone while on the road When the portable computer is connected to the corporate network all changes made to the archive
45. be able to configure the Universal Restore e to search the media for the drivers that best fit the target hardware e to get the mass storage drivers that you explicitly specify from the media This is necessary when the target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as a SCSI RAID or Fiber Channel adapter for the hard disk For more information please refer to Universal Restore p 150 The drivers will be placed in the visible Drivers folder on the bootable media The drivers are not loaded into the target machine RAM therefore the media must stay inserted or connected throughout the Universal Restore operation Adding drivers to bootable media is available on the condition that 1 The Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore add on is installed on the machine where the bootable media is created AND 2 You are creating a removable media or its ISO or detachable media such as a flash drive Drivers cannot be uploaded on a PXE server or WDS RIS The drivers can be added to the list only in groups by adding the INF files or folders containing such files Selecting individual drivers from the INF files is not possible but the media builder shows the file content for your information To add drivers 1 Click Add and browse to the INF file or a folder that contains INF files 2 Select the INF file or the folder 3 Click OK The drivers can be removed from the list only in groups by removing INF file
46. but is not obligatory You may choose not to use the shortcuts and always specify the full path to the archive vault All of the above operations except for archive and backup deletion can be performed without creating vaults The operation of creating a vault results in adding the vault name to the Vaults section of the Navigation pane Way of working with the Vaults view amp Vaults on the navigation pane top element of the vaults tree Click this item to display groups of centralized and personal vaults D Personal This group is available when the console is connected to a managed machine Expand this group to display a list of personal vaults created on the managed machine Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 80 Click any personal vault in the vaults tree to open the detailed view of this vault p 81 and to take actions on the vault p 82 archives p 84 and backups p 85 stored in there 4 1 Personal vaults A vault is called personal if it was created using direct connection of the console to a managed machine Personal vaults are specific for each managed machine Personal vaults are visible to any user that can log on to the system A user s right to back up to a personal vault is defined by the user s permission for the folder or device where the vault is located A personal vault can be organized on detachable or removable media Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault available to all users tha
47. by the virtualization server the default server s setting Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 147 This is the number of processors of the new virtual machine In most cases it is set to one The result of assignment of more than one processor to the machine is not guaranteed The number of virtual processors may be limited by the host CPU configuration the virtualization product and the guest operating system Multiple virtual processors are generally available on multi processor hosts A multicore host CPU or hyperthreading may enable multiple virtual processors on a single processor host 6 3 6 5 File destination To specify a destination 1 Selecta location to recover the backed up files to o Original location files and folders will be recovered to the same path s as they are in the backup For example if you have backed up all files and folders in C Documents Finance Reports the files will be recovered to the same path If the folder does not exist it will be created automatically o New location files will be recovered to the location that you specify in the tree The files and folders will be recovered without recreating a full path unless you clear the Recover without full path check box 2 Click OK Exclusions Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to be overwritten during recovery To specify which files and folders to exclude Set up any of the following parameters e Exclud
48. click Connect 7 If prompted specify the user name and password to access the iSCSI device To add an NDAS device In a Linux based bootable media run the management console Click Configure iSCSI NDAS devices In NDAS devices click Add device Specify the 20 character device ID If you want to allow writing data onto the device specify the five character write key Without this key the device will be available in the read only mode 6 Click OK OP CON 184 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 6 10 4 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media Linux based bootable media contains the following commands and command line utilities which you can use when running a command shell To start the command shell press CTRL ALT F2 while in the bootable media s management console Acronis command line utilities e acronis e asamba e lash e restoreraids e trueimagecmd e trueimagemnt Linux commands and utilities busybox ifconfig readcd cat init reboot cdrecord insmod rm chmod iscsiadm rmmod chown kill route chroot kpartx scp cp in scsi_id dd ls sed df lspci sg_map26 dmesg lvm sh dmraid mc sleep e2fsck mdadm ssh e2label mkdir sshd echo mke2fs strace egrep mknod swapoff fdisk mkswap swapon fsck more sysinfo fxload mount tar Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 185 gawk mtx tune2fs gpm mv udev grep parted udevinfo growisofs pecardctl udevstart grub ping umount gun
49. create an ISO image of a bootable disk to burn it later on a blank disk Linux based bootable media Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component Select the way volumes and network resources will be handled called the media style e A media with Linux style volume handling displays the volumes as for example hda1 and sdb2 It tries to reconstruct MD devices and logical LVM volumes before starting a recovery e A media with Windows style volume handling displays the volumes as for example C and D It provides access to dynamic LDM volumes The wizard will guide you through the necessary operations Please refer to Linux based bootable media p 176 for details PE based bootable media Acronis Plug in for WinPE can be added to WinPE distributions based on any of the following kernels e Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 PE 1 5 e Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 PE 1 6 e Windows Vista PE 2 0 e Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 If you already have media with PE1 x distribution unpack the media ISO to a local folder and start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component The wizard will guide you through the necessary operations Please refer to Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x p 180 for
50. created vault appears in the Personal group of the vaults tree Merging and moving personal vaults What if I need to move the existing vault from a one place to another Proceed as follows Make sure that none of the backup plans uses the existing vault while moving files or temporary disable p 111 schedules of the given plans Move the vault folder with all its archives to a new place manually by means of a third party file manager Create a new vault Edit the backup plans and tasks redirect their destination to the new vault Delete the old vault Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 83 How can I merge two vaults Suppose you have two vaults A and B in use Both vaults are used by backup plans You decide to leave only vault B moving all the archives from vault A there To do this proceed as follows 1 Make sure that none of the backup plans uses vault A while merging or temporarily disable p 111 schedules of the given plans Move the archives to vault B manually by means of a third party file manager Edit the backup plans that use vault A redirect their destination to vault B In the vaults tree select vault B to check whether the archives are displayed If not click Refresh ee a Delete vault A 4 2 Common operations 4 2 1 Operations with archives stored in a vault To perform any operation with an archive you have to select it first If the archive is protected with a password you will b
51. details see the Full and incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 132 section Workdays schedule Run the task every week on workdays from Monday through Friday During a workday the task starts only once at 9 PM The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 week s on lt Workdays gt selecting the lt Workdays gt check box automatically selects the corresponding check boxes Mon Tue Wed Thu and Fri and leaves the remaining ones unchanged 2 Once at 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From empty If you have created the task say on Monday at 11 30 AM the task will be started on the same day at 9 PM If the task was created say on Friday after 9 PM then it will be started for the first time on the nearest workday Monday in our example at 9 PM End date empty The task will be restarted for an indefinite number of weeks This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The Workdays like schedule is added to the incremental backups while the full backup is scheduled to be performed one day in the week For more details see the Full and incremental backups plus cleanup example in the Custom backup scheme p 132 section Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 91 Several weekly schedules for one task In the case when the task needs to be run on different days of the weeks with different time intervals consider adding a dedicated schedule to ever
52. every 1 day at 10 AM as well as more complex schedules example of a complex daily schedule a task will be run every 3 days starting from January 15 During the specified days the task will be repeated every 2 hours from 10 AM to 10 PM Thus complex schedules specify the sessions on which the scheme should run In the discussion below days can be replaced with scheduled sessions Number of levels Select from 2 to 16 backup levels See the example stated below for details Roll back period The guaranteed number of sessions that one can go back in the archive at any time Calculated automatically depending on the schedule parameters and the numbers of levels you select See the example below for details Example Schedule parameters are set as follows e Recur Every 1 day e Frequency Once at 6 PM Number of levels 4 This is how the first 14 days or 14 sessions of this scheme s schedule look Shaded numbers denote backup levels PP PE PEP ELE EE EE Backups of different levels have different types e Last level in this case level 4 backups are full e Backups of intermediate levels 2 3 are differential e First level 1 backups are incremental A cleanup mechanism ensures that only the most recent backups of each level are kept Here is how the archive looks on day 8 a day before creating a new full backup The scheme allows for efficient data storage more backups accumulate toward the current tim
53. for archive cleanup only if On schedule is For example the cleanup can be scheduled to start on the last day of each selected month This option is available only if you selected On schedule in Apply the rules Examples Weekly full backup The following scheme yields a full backup performed every Friday night Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Here all parameters except Schedule in Full backup are left empty All backups in the archive are kept indefinitely no archive cleanup is performed Full and incremental backup plus cleanup With the following scheme the archive will consist of weekly full backups and daily incremental backups We further require that a full backup begin only after all users have logged off Full backup Schedule Weekly every Friday at 10 00 PM Full backup Conditions User is logged off Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 9 00 PM Also let all backups older than one year be deleted from the archive and let the cleanup be performed upon creating a new backup Retention rules Delete backups older than 12 months Apply the rules After backing up By default a one year old full backup will not be deleted until all incremental backups that depend on it become subject to deletion too For more information see Retention rules p 31 Monthly full weekly differential and daily incremental backups plus cleanup This example demonstrates the use of all options ava
54. hours The task starts on a certain date say September 15 2009 and ends after three months The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 2 Every 1 day s Every 3 hours From 12 00 00 AM midnight Until 09 00 00 PM thus the task will be performed 8 times a day with a 3 hour time interval After the last daily recurrence at 9 PM the next day comes and the task starts over again from midnight Effective From 09 15 2009 If September 15 2009 is the current date of the task s creation and say 01 15 PM is the task s creation time the task will be started when the nearest time interval comes at 03 00 PM in our example To 12 15 2009 On this date the task will be performed for the last time but the task itself is still available in the Tasks view Several daily schedules for one task There are some cases when you might need the task to be run several times a day or even several times a day with different time intervals For such cases consider adding several schedules to a single task For example suppose that the task has to be run every 3rd day starting from 09 20 2009 five times a day first at 8 AM second at 12 PM noon third at 3 PM fourth at 5 PM fifth at 7 PM Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 89 The obvious way is to add five simple schedules If you spend one minute for examination you can think out a more optimal way As you can see the time interval between the first an
55. is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Use the task credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section o Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 167 According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 7 5 Location selection Specify a destination where the exported object will be stored Exporting backups to the same archive is not allowed 1 Selecting the export destination Enter the full path to the destination in the Path field or select the desired destination in the folders tree e To export data to a centralized unmanaged vault expand the Centralized vaults group and click the vault e To export data to a personal vault expand
56. management The disk layout will be displayed according to the operating system you select 6 11 4 Disk management view Acronis Disk Director Lite is controlled through the Disk management view of the console The top part of the view contains a disks and volumes table enabling data sorting and columns customization and toolbar The table presents the numbers of the disks as well as assigned letter label type capacity free space size used space size file system and status for each volume The toolbar comprises of icons to launch the Undo Redo and Commit actions intended for pending operations p 205 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 191 The graphic panel at the bottom of the view also graphically depicts all the disks and their volumes as rectangles with basic data on them label letter size status type and file system Both parts of the view also depict all unallocated disk space that can be used in volume creation Starting the operations Any operation can be launched e From the volume or disk context menu both in the table and the graphic panel e From the Disk management menu of the console e From the Operations bar on the Actions and Tools pane Note that the list of available operations in the context menu the Disk management menu and the Operations bar depends on the selected volume or disk type The same is true for unallocated space as well Displaying operation results The results of any disk or
57. mount and configure the mount settings for every volume assign a letter or enter the mount point choose the read write or read only access mode When you complete all the required steps click OK to mount the volumes 6 5 1 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree O O eo If the archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault If the archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts If the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted ona mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself If the archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or
58. name for the new archive and displays it in the Name field The name commonly looks like Archive 1 The generated name is unique within the selected location If you are satisfied with the automatically generated name click OK Otherwise enter another unique name and click OK Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 123 Backing up to an existing archive You can configure the backup plan to back up to an existing archive To do so select the archive in the archives table or type the archive name in the Name field If the archive is protected with a password the program will ask for it in the pop up window By selecting the existing archive you are meddling in the area of another backup plan that uses the archive This is not an issue if the other plan is discontinued but in general you should follow the rule one backup plan one archive Doing the opposite will not prevent the program from functioning but is not practical or efficient except for some specific cases Why two or more plans should not back up to the same archive 1 Backing up different sources to the same archive makes using the archive difficult from the usability standpoint When it comes to recovery every second counts but you might be lost in the archive content Backup plans that operate with the same archive should back up the same data items say both plans back up volume C 2 Applying multiple retention rules to an archive makes the archive content in some
59. name for the task To create a validation task perform the following steps General Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the validation task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Credentials p 157 Optional The validation task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task credentials if necessary To access this option select the Advanced view check box 156 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 What to validate Validate Choose an object to validate Archive p 157 in that case you need to specify the archive Backup p 158 specify the archive first and then select the desired backup in this archive Vault p 158 select a vault or other location which archives to validate Access Credentials p 159 Optional Provide credentials for accessing the source if the task account does not have enough privileges to access it To access this option select the check box for Advanced view When to validate Validate p 159 Specify when and how often to perform validation After you configure all the required settings click OK to create the validation task 6 4 1 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on I
60. new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance Files of the fully configured and operational machine will be placed in the folder you select You can start the machine using the respective virtualization software or prepare the machine files for further usage Disk management Agent for Windows includes Acronis Disk Director Lite a handy disk management utility Disk management operations such as cloning disks converting disks creating formatting and deleting volumes changing a disk partitioning style between MBR and GPT or changing a disk label can be performed either in the operating system or using bootable media 131 1 Universal Restore The Universal Restore add on enables you to use the restore to dissimilar hardware functionality on the machine where the agent is installed and create bootable media with this functionality Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for Windows start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset 1 3 2 Bootable components and media builder Bootable components of the agent enable operations with reboot such as recovery of the volume containing the currently active operating system Once the operations are completed the machine boots into the operating system again The bootable components are based on the Linux kernel You can choose not to install the boota
61. on the machine For more information about disk groups please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article 222189 Description of Disk Groups in Windows Disk Management http support microsoft com kb 222189 EN US Dynamic disk A hard disk managed by Logical Disk Manager LDM that is available in Windows starting with Windows 2000 LDM helps flexibly allocate volumes on a storage device for better fault tolerance better performance or larger volume size A dynamic disk can use either the master boot record MBR or GUID partition table GPT partition style In addition to MBR or GPT each dynamic disk has a hidden database where the LDM stores the dynamic volumes configuration Each dynamic disk holds the complete information about all dynamic volumes existing in the disk group which makes for better storage reliability The database occupies the last 1MB of an MBR disk On a GPT disk Windows creates the dedicated LDM Metadata partition taking space from the Microsoft Reserved Partition MSR Disk 1 LDM database Disk2 Protec GPT Microsoft LDM tive Reserved database MBR Partition MSR LDM Metadata partition ee 1 MB Dynamic disks organized on MBR Disk 1 and GPT Disk 2 disks For more information about dynamic disks please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base articles Disk Management Windows XP Professional Resource Kit http technet microsoft com en us library bb457110 as
62. order to choose Friday in the Weekly monthly field you need to first select it in the Back up on field Such an archive would allow you to compare your financial documents as of the first and the last day of work and have a five year history of all documents etc No daily backups Consider a more exotic GFS scheme e Start backup at 12 00 PM e Back up on Friday e Weekly monthly Friday e Keep backups o Daily 1 week o Weekly 1 month o Monthly indefinitely Backup is thus performed only on Fridays This makes Friday the only choice for weekly and monthly backups leaving no other date for daily backups The resulting Grandfather Father archive will hence consist only of weekly differential and monthly full backups Even though it is possible to use GFS to create such an archive the Custom scheme is more flexible in this situation 6 2 9 5 Tower of Hanoi scheme At a glance e Upto 16 levels of full differential and incremental backups e Next level backups are twice as rare as previous level backups e One backup of each level is stored at a time e Higher density of more recent backups Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 129 Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Tower of Hanoi scheme Schedule Set up a daily p 88 weekly p 90 or monthly p 92 schedule Setting up schedule parameters allows creating simple schedules example of a simple daily schedule a backup task will be run
63. p 208 that produce the archives p 207 stored in a managed location p 215 Being an alternative to the agent side validation p 207 the validation on the storage node side relieves the production servers of unnecessary CPU load Task In Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 a task is a set of sequential actions to be performed on a managed machine p 215 when a certain time comes or a certain event occurs The actions are described in an xml script file The start condition schedule exists in the protected registry keys Tower of Hanoi A popular backup scheme p 209 aimed to maintain the optimal balance between a backup archive p 207 size and the number of recovery points p 217 available from the archive Unlike the GFS p 215 scheme that has only three levels of recovery resolution daily weekly monthly resolution the Tower of Hanoi scheme continuously reduces the time interval between recovery points as the backup age increases This allows for very efficient usage of the backup storage For more information please refer to Tower of Hanoi backup scheme p 29 218 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 U Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore The Acronis proprietary technology that helps boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine The Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controll
64. pegs The goal is to move the ring series to the third peg You are only allowed to move one ring at a time and are prohibited from placing a larger ring above a smaller ring The solution is to shift the first ring every other move moves 1 3 5 7 9 11 the second ring at intervals of four moves moves 2 6 10 the third ring at intervals of eight moves moves 4 12 and so on For example if there are five rings labeled A B C D and E in the puzzle the solution gives the following order of moves The Tower of Hanoi backup scheme is based on the same patterns It operates with Sessions instead of Moves and with Backup levels instead of Rings Commonly an N level scheme pattern contains N th power of two sessions So the five level Tower of Hanoi backup scheme cycles the pattern that consists of 16 sessions moves from 1 to 16 in the above figure The table shows the pattern for the five level backup scheme The pattern consists of 16 sessions Ee BPREBBEBBRRE BEE EDENENENENENENE The Tower of Hanoi backup scheme implies keeping only one backup per level All the outdated backups have to be deleted So the scheme allows for efficient data storage more backups accumulate toward the present time Having four backups you can recover data as of today yesterday half a week ago or a week ago For the five level scheme you can also recover data backed up two weeks ago So every additional backup level doubles t
65. recovery operations to the specified SNMP managers o Types of events to send choose the types of events to be sent All events Errors and warnings or Errors only o Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to o Community type the name of SNMP community to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct Do not send SNMP notifications to disable sending the log events of the recovery operations to SNMP managers 3 3 2 6 Error handling These options are effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media These options enable you to specify how to handle errors that might occur during recovery Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode The preset is Disabled With the silent mode enabled the program will automatically handle situations requiring user interaction where possible If an operation cannot continue without user interaction it will fail Details of the operation including errors if any can be found in the operation log Re attempt if an error occurs The preset is Enabled Number of attempts 5 Interval between attempts 30 seconds When a recoverable error occurs the program re attempts to perform the unsuccessful operation You can set
66. recovery recovery Notifications E mail p 74 Win Pop up p 75 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 71 Event tracing Windows events log p 76 7 7 SNMP p 76 p i IA Pre Post commands This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and PE based bootable media The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after the data recovery Example of how you can use the pre post commands e launch the Checkdisk command in order to find and fix logical file system errors physical errors or bad sectors to be started before the recovery starts or after the recovery ends The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause A post recovery command will not be executed if the recovery proceeds with reboot To specify pre post commands 1 Enable pre post commands execution by checking the following options o Execute before the recovery o Execute after the recovery 2 Do any of the following o Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file o Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK Pre recovery command To specify a command batch file to be executed before the recovery process starts 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user inpu
67. send the backup operations events to the SNMP managers Choose one of the following e Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options p 46 e Send SNMP notifications individually for backup operation events to send the events of the backup operations to the specified SNMP managers o Types of events to send choose the types of events to be sent All events Errors and warnings or Errors only o Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to o Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running the SNMP management application and the sending machine belong The typical community is public 62 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Click Send test message to check if the settings are correct Do not send SNMP notifications to disable sending the log events of the backup operations to SNMP managers 3 3 1 12 Fast incremental differential backup The option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is effective for incremental and differential disk level backup This option defines whether a file change is detected using the file size and time stamp or by comparing the file contents to those stored in the archive The preset is Enabled Incremental or differential backu
68. structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view If you set a 64K cluster size for FAT16 FAT32 or an 8KB 64KB cluster size for NTFS Windows can mount the volume but some programs e g Setup programs might calculate its disk space incorrectly 6 11 7 Pending operations All operations which were prepared by the user in manual mode or with the aid of a wizard are considered pending until the user issues the specific command for the changes to be made permanent Until then Acronis Disk Director Lite will only demonstrate the new volume structure that will result from the operations that have been planned to be performed on disks and volumes This approach enables you to control all planned operations double check the intended changes and if necessary cancel operations before they are executed To prevent you from performing any unintentional change on your disk the program will first display the list of all pending operations The Disk management view contains the toolbar with icons to launch the Undo Redo and Commit actions intended for pending operations These actions might also be launched from the Disk management menu of the console All planned operations are added to the pending operation list The Undo action lets you undo the latest operation in the list While the list is not empty this action is available The Redo action lets you reinstate the last pending operation that was undone The Commit
69. sure the machine s date and time settings are correct Schedule To define when a task has to be executed you need to specify an event or multiple events The task will be launched as soon as any of the events occurs The table below lists the events available under Windows operating systems Event Time Daily Weekly Monthly Time passed since the last successful backup has completed specify the length of time User logon any user current user specify the user s account User logoff any user current user specify the user s account System startup Free space change specify the amount of free space change on any volume selected for backup or containing data selected for backup An event in Windows event log specify the parameters of the event Condition For backup operations only you can specify a condition or multiple conditions in addition to the events Once any of the events occurs the scheduler checks the condition and runs the task if the condition is met With multiple conditions all of them must be met simultaneously to enable task execution The table below lists the conditions available under Windows operating systems Condition run the task only if User is idle a screen saver is running or the machine is locked Location s host is available The task run time is within the specified time interval All users are logged off The specified period of time has passed since the last successful backup comp
70. task or a task that needs interaction The task changes to the Stopping state and then to the Idle state A waiting task can also be stopped In this case since the task is not running stop means removing it from the queue Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 105 Task state diagram Need user interaction Task completed The other task is completed 1 Waiting for condition 2 Waiting when another task locks the necessary resources Task statuses A task can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK A task status is derived from the result of the last run of the task Eeee How it is determined How to handle Last result is Failed Identify the failed task gt Check the task log to find out the reason of the failure then do one or more of the following e Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually e Edit the failed task to prevent its future failure e Edit the local plan to prevent its future failure in case a local plan has failed e Edit the backup policy on the management server in case a centralized plan has failed Last result is View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Perform Succeeded with actions to prevent the future warnings or failure warning Last result is No action is required Succeeded or A H The state means that the task has never been started or Stopped has been started but has not finished yet a
71. the plan s tasks Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 103 ae How it is determined How to handle Identify the tasks that need interaction the program will display what action is needed gt Stop the tasks or enable the tasks to run change media provide additional space on the vault ignore the read error create the missing Acronis Secure Zone Need At least one task needs interaction user interaction Otherwise see 2 At least one task is running Otherwise see 3 At least one task is waiting Otherwise see 4 4 Stopping At least one task is stopping Otherwise see 5 No action is required Waiting for condition This situation is quite normal but delaying a backup for too long is risky The solution may be to set the maximum delay or force the condition tell the user to log off enable the required network connection Waiting while another task locks the necessary resources A one time waiting case may occur when a task start is delayed or a task run lasts much longer than usual for some particular reason and this way prevents another task from starting This situation is resolved automatically when the obstructing task comes to an end Consider stopping a task if it hangs for too long to enable the next task to start Persistent task overlapping may result from an incorrectly scheduled plan or plans It makes sense to edit the plan in this case No action is required 5 iae lithe ta
72. the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them After the initialization all the disk space remains unallocated and so still impossible to be used for program installation or file storage To be able to use it proceed normally to the Create volume operation If you decide to change the disk settings it can be done later using the standard Acronis Disk Director Lite disk tools 6 11 5 2 Basic disk cloning Sometimes it is necessary to transfer all the disk data onto a new disk It can be a case of expanding the system volume starting a new system layout or disk evacuation due to a hardware fault In any case the reason for the Clone basic disk operation can be summed up as the necessity to transfer all the source disk data to a target disk exactly as it is Acronis Disk Director Lite allows the operation to be carried out to basic MBR disks only To plan the Clone basic disk operation 1 Select a disk you want to clone 2 Select a disk as target for the cloning operation 3 Select a cloning method and specify advanced options The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately It is advisable that you deactivate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 206 ASRM if it is active before cloning a system disk Otherwise the cloned operating system might not boot You can activate the ASRM again after the cloning is completed If deactivation is not pos
73. the recovery operation With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows you can recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance Files of the new virtual machine will be placed in the folder you select You can start the machine using the respective virtualization software or prepare the machine files for further usage The Citrix Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 151 XenServer virtual appliance can be imported to a XenServer using Citrix XenCenter The VMware Workstation machine can be converted to the open virtualization format OVF using the VMware OVF tool With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi you can recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine on the respective virtualization server To convert a disk backup to a virtual machine 1 10 11 12 Connect the console to a machine where Agent for Windows Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed Do any of the following o Click Recover to open the Recover data page Start creating a recovery task as described in Recovering data p 137 Select the archive and then select the disk or volume backup you want to convert o Use the Navigation pane to navigate to the vault where the archive is stored Select the archive and then select the disk or volume backu
74. the security log Security you must be a member of the Administrators group To view properties of an event including the event source and event number 1 In Event Viewer click the name of a log that you want to view for example Application Note To be able to open the security log Security you must be a member of the Administrators group 2 In the list of events in the right pane double click the name of an event whose properties you want to view 96 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 3 In the Event Properties dialog box view the event s properties such as the event source shown in the Source field and the event number shown in the Event ID field When you are finished click OK to close the Event Properties dialog box 5 5 Conditions Conditions add more flexibility to the scheduler enabling to execute backup tasks with respect to certain conditions Once a specified event occurs see the Scheduling section for the list of available events the scheduler checks the specified condition and executes the task if the condition is met The scheduler behavior in case the event occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met is defined by the Task start conditions p 66 backup option There you can specify how important the conditions are for the backup strategy e conditions are obligatory put the backup task run on hold until all the conditions are met e conditions are preferable but a b
75. tools pane e Vault Name The Actions bar is available when clicking the vault in the vaults tree Duplicates actions of the vault s toolbar e Archive Name The Actions bar is available when you select an archive in the archives table Duplicates actions of the archives toolbar e Backup Name The Actions bar is available when you expand the archive and click on any of its backups Duplicates actions of the archives toolbar 4 1 2 Actions on personal vaults To perform any operation except for creation with a vault you must select it first All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Vault name actions bar on the Actions and Tools pane and from the Vault name actions item of the main menu respectively The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with personal vaults To Do Create a personal Click Ea Create vault The procedure of creating personal vaults is described in depth in the Creating a personal vault p 83 section Edit a vault 1 Select the vault 2 Click Edit The Edit personal vault page lets you edit the vault s name and information in the Comments field 82 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 4 1 2 1 Change user account for accessing a vault Create Acronis Secure Zone Explore a vault s content Validate a vault Delete a vault Refresh vault table inform
76. transferred to the background If you try to log off shut down or hibernate the machine using the Start Menu commands the end of the current session will be automatically postponed until the recovery is completed Should you decide to switch off the machine with the Power button though all the changes made to the system since the last boot up would be lost the system will not be recovered not even partially and the only possible solution in this case will be to start the recovery process anew from a bootable media 6 The background recovery continues until all the selected volumes are recovered the log entry is made and the Acronis Active Restore icon disappears from the system tray Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 43 3 Options This section covers Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 options that can be configured using Graphical User Interface The content of this section is applicable to both stand alone and advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 3 1 Console options The console options define the way information is represented in the Graphical User Interface of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 To access the console options select Options gt Console options from the top menu 3 1 1 Startup page This option defines whether to show the Welcome screen or the Dashboard upon connection of the console to a managed machine or to the management server The preset is the Welcome screen To make a selecti
77. txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt Exclusion examples By name File1 log Excludes all files named File1 log By path C Finance test log Excludes the file named test log located in the folder c Finance Mask Excludes all files with the log extension 122 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Mask my log Excludes all log files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my 6 2 7 Archive Specify where the archive will be stored and the name of the archive 1 Selecting the destination Enter the full path to the destination in the Path field or select the desired destination in the folders tree e To back up data to a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault e To back up data to a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault e To back up data to a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder e To back up data to a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mo
78. using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section o Use the following credentials The program will access the destination using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the destination Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 149 e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK 6 3 8 When to recover Select when to start the recovery task e Recover now the recovery task will be started immediately after you click the final OK e Recover later the recovery task will be started at the date and time you specify If you do not need to schedule the task and wish to start it manually afterwards select the Task will be started manually do no schedule the task check box 6 3 9 Universal Restore Use Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore when you need to recover and boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system startup such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset To learn more about the Universal Restore technology see the Universal Restore p 40 section Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore is not available when e amachine is booted with Acronis Startup
79. vault p 216 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ASRM A modification of the bootable agent p 209 residing on the system disk and configured to start at boot time when F11 is pressed Acronis Startup Recovery Manager eliminates the need for rescue media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs the user reboots the machine hits F11 on prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and performs data recovery in the same way as with ordinary bootable media Limitation requires re activation of loaders other than Windows loaders and GRUB Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 206 Agent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent An application that performs data backup and recovery and enables other management operations on the machine p 215 such as task management and operations with hard disks The type of data that can be backed up depends on the agent type Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 includes the agents for backing up disks and files and the agents for backing up virtual machines residing on virtualization servers Agent side cleanup Cleanup p 211 performed by an agent p 207 according to the backup plan p 208 that produces the archive p 207 Agent side cleanup is performed in unmanaged vaults p 219 Agent side validation Validation p 219 performed by an agent p 207 accordin
80. volume operation you have just planned are immediately displayed in the Disk management view of the console For example if you create a volume it will be immediately shown in the table as well as in graphical form at the bottom of the view Any volume changes including changing the volume letter or label are also immediately displayed in the view 6 11 5 Disk operations Acronis Disk Director Lite includes the following operations that can be performed on disks e Disk Initialization p 192 initializes the new hardware added to the system e Basic disk cloning p 193 transfers complete data from the source basic MBR disk to the target e Disk conversion MBR to GPT p 195 converts an MBR partition table to GPT e Disk conversion GPT to MBR p 196 converts a GPT partition table to MBR e Disk conversion Basic to Dynamic p 196 converts a basic disk to dynamic e Disk conversion Dynamic to Basic p 197 converts a dynamic disk to basic The full version of Acronis Disk Director will provide more tools and utilities for working with disks Acronis Disk Director Lite must obtain exclusive access to the target disk This means no other disk management utilities like Windows Disk Management utility can access it at that time If you receive a message stating that the disk cannot be blocked close the disk management applications that use this disk and start again If you cannot determine which applications use the disk c
81. will be transferred to its stationary copy after the first backup operation If you select the password protected Acronis Secure Zone as the primary destination keep in mind that the archive in the secondary destination will not be protected with a password To use Dual destination 1 Select the check box for Use dual destination 2 Browse to the secondary destination or enter the full path to the destination manually 3 Click OK You might have to provide the access credentials for the secondary destination Enter the credentials on prompt 3 3 1 18 Task start conditions This option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under bootable media 66 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 This option determines the program behavior in case a backup task is about to start the scheduled time comes or the event specified in the schedule occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met For more information on conditions please see Scheduling p 87 and Conditions p 97 The preset is Wait until the conditions are met Wait until the conditions are met With this setting the scheduler starts monitoring the conditions and launches the task as soon as the conditions are met If the conditions are never met the task will never start To handle the situation when the conditions are not met for too long and further delaying the backup is becoming risky
82. you boot from media on a given hardware configuration re create the bootable media with the appropriate mode number in our example vga 0x318 typed in the Kernel parameters window see the Bootable Media Builder p 176 section for details 6 10 3 2 Configuring iSCSI and NDAS devices This section describes how to configure Internet Small Computer System Interface iSCSI devices and Network Direct Attached Storage NDAS devices when working under bootable media These devices are connected to the machine through a network interface and appear as if they were locally attached devices On the network an iSCSI device is identified by its IP address and an NDAS device is identified by its device ID An iSCSI device is sometimes called an iSCSI target A hardware or software component that provides interaction between the machine and the iSCSI target is called the iSCSI initiator The name of the iSCSI initiator is usually defined by an administrator of the server that hosts the device To add an iSCSI device 1 Ina bootable media Linux based or PE based run the management console 2 Click Configure iSCSI NDAS devices in a Linux based media or Run the iSCSI Setup in a PE based media 3 Specify the IP address and port of the iSCSI device s host and the name of the iSCSI initiator 4 Ifthe host requires authentication specify the user name and password for it 5 Click OK 6 Select the iSCSI device from the list and then
83. you can set the time interval after which the task will run irrespective of the condition Select the Run the task anyway after check box and specify the time interval The task will start as soon as the conditions are met OR the maximum time delay lapses depending on which comes first Time diagram Wait until conditions are met gt waiting f iti Scheduled Time interval time or event Condition Idle Waiting Running Idle Task state _ Os y d gt t Timei L lt waiting f jiti Scheduled time or event Condition Idle Waiting Running Idle Task state _ Skip the task execution Delaying a backup might be unacceptable for example when you need to back up data strictly at the specified time Then it makes sense to skip the backup rather than wait for the conditions especially if the events occur relatively often 3 3 1 19 Task failure handling This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 67 This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option determines the program behavior when any of the backup plan s tasks fails The preset is not to restart a failed task The program will try to execute the failed task again if you select the Restart a failed task check box and specify the number of attempts and the time interval between the attempts The program stops trying as soon as an attempt completes successfully OR the specified nu
84. 208 that appears on the managed machine p 215 as a result of deploying a backup policy p 208 from the management server p 216 Such plan can be modified only by editing the backup policy Centralized management Management of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 infrastructure through a central management unit known as Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server p 216 The centralized management operations include e creating applying and managing backup policies p 208 e creating and managing static p 217 and dynamic groups p 213 of machines p 215 e managing the tasks p 218 existing on the machines e creating and managing centralized vaults p 210 for storing archives e managing storage nodes p 217 e monitoring activities of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components viewing the centralized log and more Centralized task A task p 218 belonging to a centralized backup plan p 210 Such task appears on the managed machine p 215 as a result of deploying a backup policy p 208 from the management server p 216 and can be modified only by editing the backup policy Centralized vault A networked location allotted by the management server p 216 administrator to serve as storage for the backup archives p 207 A centralized vault can be managed by a storage node p 217 or be unmanaged The total number and size of archives stored in a centralized vault are limited by the storage
85. 4 Acronis COMPUTE WITH CONFIDENCE WWW ACRONIS COM Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Workstation User s Guide Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 All rights reserved Acronis and Acronis Secure Zone are registered trademarks of Acronis Inc Acronis Compute with Confidence Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Active Restore and the Acronis logo are trademarks of Acronis Inc Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds VMware is a registered trademark of VMware Inc Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners Distribution of substantively modified versions of this document is prohibited without the explicit permission of the copyright holder Distribution of this work or derivative work in any standard paper book form for commercial purposes is prohibited unless prior permission is obtained from the copyright holder DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Table of Contents 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8
86. 9 51 Archive selection 137 138 140 157 160 161 165 166 Archive validation 118 135 At Windows Event Log event 95 B Back up later scheme 125 Back up now scheme 125 Backing up dynamic volumes Windows 33 137 Backup 17 21 207 211 212 214 215 219 Backup archive Archive 17 207 208 210 211 214 215 216 217 218 219 Backup operation 207 208 Backup options 208 214 Backup performance 58 Backup plan Plan 17 116 207 208 209 210 211 215 217 218 219 Backup plan details 103 107 113 Backup plan execution states 103 113 Backup plan statuses 103 104 113 Backup plans and tasks 102 103 119 Backup plan s credentials 117 119 Backup policy Policy 208 210 211 216 217 Backup priority 50 58 Backup scheme 208 209 215 218 Backup schemes 118 125 Backup selection 157 158 160 162 165 167 Backup splitting 50 63 Basic concepts 7 17 116 Basic disk cloning 192 193 Basic precautions 190 Bootability troubleshooting 153 Bootable agent 39 173 206 209 Bootable components and media builder 14 Bootable media 14 17 65 102 137 174 191 206 209 212 216 Building Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution 176 182 Built in group 209 C Centralized backup plan 38 208 209 210 Centralized management 210 211 212 Centralized task 209 210 212 Central
87. Acronis Secure Zone while the operating system is running or using bootable media To create Acronis Secure Zone perform the following steps Space Disk p 170 Choose a hard disk if several on which to create the zone Acronis Secure Zone is created using unallocated space if available or at the expense of the volume s free space Size p 170 Specify the exact size of the zone Moving or resizing of locked volumes such as the volume containing the currently active operating system requires a reboot Settings Password p 171 Optional Protect the Acronis Secure Zone from unauthorized access with a password The prompt for the password appear at any operation relating to the zone After you configure the required settings click OK In the Result confirmation p 171 window review the expected layout and click OK to start creating the zone 6 8 1 1 Acronis Secure Zone Disk The Acronis Secure Zone can be located on any fixed hard drive Acronis Secure Zone is always created at the end of the hard disk A machine can have only one Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is created using unallocated space if available or at the expense of the volumes free space The Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk or a disk using the GPT partitioning style To allocate space for Acronis Secure Zone 1 Choose a hard disk if several on which to create the zone The unallocated space is selected by default
88. DDDDM The schedule marked out according to the GFS scheme Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly Friday Acronis uses incremental and differential backups that help save storage space and optimize the cleanup so that consolidation is not needed In terms of backup methods weekly backup is differential Dif monthly backup is full F and daily backup is incremental I The first backup is always full The Weekly Monthly parameter splits the total schedule into daily weekly and monthly schedules Assume you select Friday for Weekly Monthly backup Here is the real schedule of the backup tasks that will be created Total D D D DW D D D D W D D DDW D D D D M Daily wa F t i tit i f fees tS tt Weekly ak Dif _ _ a Df M 26 onthly sk FF l Backup tasks created according to the GFS scheme by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly Friday Keep backups Daily This step defines the retention rule for daily backups The cleanup task will run after each daily backup and delete all daily backups that are older than you specify Keep backups Weekly This step defines the retention rule for weekly backups The cleanup task will run after each weekly backup and delete all weekly backups that are older than you specify The weekly backups retention period cannot be less than the daily backups retention period It is usually set severa
89. L p 145 Select the destination disk for each of the source disks NT signature p 143 Select the way the recovered disk s signature will be handled The disk signature is used by Windows and the Linux kernel version 2 6 and later Disk destination To specify a destination disk 1 Select a disk where you want the selected disk to recover to The destination disk s space should be at least the same size as the uncompressed image data 2 Click OK All the data stored on the target disk will be replaced by the backed up data so be careful and watch out for non backed up data that you might need NT signature When the MBR is selected along with the disk backup you need to retain operating system bootability on the target disk volume The operating system must have the system volume information e g volume letter matched with the disk NT signature which is kept in the MBR disk record But two disks with the same NT signature cannot work properly under one operating system If there are two disks having the same NT signature and comprising of a system volume on a machine at the startup the operating system runs from the first disk discovers the same signature on the second one automatically generates a new unique NT signature and assigns it to the second disk As a result all the volumes on the second disk will lose their letters all paths will be invalid on the disk and programs won t find their files The operating system o
90. MBR of the first disk run the following command setup hd Exit the GRUB shell quit Unmount the mounted file systems and then reboot umount mnt system dev umount mnt system proc umount mnt system boot umount mnt system reboot Reconfigure the bootloader by using tools and documentation from the Linux distribution that you use For example in Debian and Ubuntu you may need to edit some commented lines in the boot grub menu lst file and then run the update grub script otherwise the changes might not take effect 6 3 11 2 About Windows loaders Windows NT 2000 XP 2003 A part of the loader resides in the partition boot sector the rest is in the files ntldr boot ini ntdetect com ntbootdd sys boot ini is a text file that contains the loader configuration Example boot loader timeout 30 default multi disk rdisk partition 1 WINDOWS operating systems Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 155 multi disk rdisk partition 1 WINDOWS Microsoft Windows XP Professional noexecute optin fastdetect Windows Vista 2008 A part of the loader resides in the partition boot sector the rest is in the files bootmgr boot bcd At starting Windows boot bcd is mounted to the registry key HKLM BCDOOO00000 6 4 Validating vaults archives and backups Validation is an operation that checks the possibility of data recovery from a backup Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files fr
91. NICs according to their slot order on that machine NIC1 occupies the slot closest to the processor NIC2 is in the next slot and so on When the bootable agent starts on that machine it will find no NICs with known MAC addresses and will configure the NICs in the same order as you did Example The bootable agent could use one of the network adapters for communication with the management console through the production network Automatic configuration could be done for this connection Sizeable data for recovery could be transferred through the second NIC included in the dedicated backup network by means of static TCP IP settings Network port While creating bootable media you have an option to pre configure the network port that the bootable agent listens for incoming connection The choice is available between e the default port e the currently used port e the new port enter the port number If the port has not been pre configured the agent uses the default port number 9876 This port is also used as default by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 179 Drivers for Universal Restore While creating bootable media you have an option to add Windows drivers to the media The drivers will be used by Universal Restore when recovering Windows on a machine with a dissimilar processor different motherboard or different mass storage device than in the backed up system You will
92. POP enter the name of the POP server e Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 e User name enter the user name e Password enter the password o Select the Use the specified outgoing mail server check box to enable an SMTP server and to set up its settings e Outgoing mail server SMTP enter the name of the SMTP server 60 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 e Port set the port of the SMTP server By default the port is set to 25 e User name enter the user name e Password enter the password 6 Click Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct Messenger service WinPopup This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems on the sending machine and only for Windows on the receiving machine This option is not available when operating under bootable media The option enables you to receive WinPopup notifications about the backup task s successful completion failure or need for interaction The preset is Disabled Before configuring WinPopup notifications make sure the Messenger service is started on both the machine executing the task and the machine that will receive messages The Messenger service is not started by default in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 family Change the service Startup mode to Automatic and start the service To configure WinPopup notifications 1 Select the Send WinPopup notifications check box
93. PT volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Type as of the target Type as of the target Type as of the target Unallocated space disk group N A Dynamic volume Dynamic volume Type as of the Simple source Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Unallocated space basic MBR disk Unallocated space basic GPT disk Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Basic MBR volume Basic GPT volume Moving and resizing volumes during recovery You can resize the resulting basic volume both MBR and GPT during recovery or change the volume s location on the disk A resulting dynamic volume cannot be moved or resized Preparing disk groups and volumes Before recovering dynamic volumes to bare metal you should create a disk group on the target hardware You also might need to create or increase unallocated space on an existing disk group This can be done by deleting volumes or converting basic disks to dynamic You might want to change the target volume type basic simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 0 1 RAID 5 This can be done by deleting the target volume and creating a new volume on the resulting unallocated space Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 includes a handy disk management utility which enables you to perform the above operat
94. Return to the management console by pressing CTRL ALT F1 or by running the command bin product Do not reboot the machine at this point Otherwise you will have to create the volume structure again Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 187 8 Click Recover then specify the path to the archive and any other required parameters and then click OK Note This procedure does not work when connected to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Bootable Agent remotely because the command shell is not available in this case Example Suppose that you previously performed a disk backup of a machine with the following disk configuration The machine has two 1 gigabyte and two 2 gigabyte SCSI hard disks mounted on dev sda dev sdb dev sdc and dev sdd respectively The first and second pairs of hard disks are configured as two MD devices both in the RAID 1 configuration and are mounted on dev mdO and dev md1 respectively A logical volume is based on the two MD devices and is mounted on dev my_volgroup my_logvol The following picture illustrates this configuration Idevisda Idev sdb Idev sde dev sdd Idevimdd Idevimd1 Idevimy_volgroup my_logvol Do the following to recover data from this archive Step 1 Creating the volume structure 1 2 3 188 Boot the machine from a Linux based bootable media In the management console press CTRL ALT F2 Run the following commands to create the MD devices
95. The minimum size is approximately 50MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk o typing an exact value in the Acronis Secure Zone Size field 4 Click OK 6 8 2 3 Deleting Acronis Secure Zone To delete the zone without uninstalling the program proceed as follows 1 Inthe Acronis Secure Zone Actions bar on the Actions and tools pane select Delete 2 In the Delete Acronis Secure Zone window select volumes to which you want to add the space freed from the zone and then click OK If you select several volumes the space will be distributed proportionally to each partition If you do not select any volume the freed space becomes unallocated After you click OK Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will start deleting the zone When removing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent from the system you have two options to keep Acronis Secure Zone along with its contents which will enable data recovery on booting from bootable media or remove Acronis Secure Zone 6 9 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is a modification of the bootable agent p 209 residing on the system disk in Windows or on the boot partition in Linux and configured to start at boot time on pressing F11 It eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility Activate Enables the boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager if you do not have the GR
96. The default value is 12 00 PM Back up on Specifies the days on which to perform a backup The default value is Workdays Weekly Monthly Specifies which of the days selected in the Back up on field you want to reserve for weekly and monthly backups A monthly backup will be performed every fourth such day The default value is Friday Keep backups Specifies how long you want the backups to be stored in the archive A term can be set in hours days weeks months or years For monthly backups you can also select Keep indefinitely if you want them to be saved forever The default values for each backup type are as follows Daily 7 days recommended minimum Weekly 4 weeks Monthly indefinitely The retention period for weekly backups must exceed that for daily backups the monthly backups retention period must be greater than the weekly backups retention period We recommend setting a retention period of at least one week for daily backups At all times a backup is not deleted until all backups that directly depend on it become subject to deletion as well This is why you might see a weekly or a monthly backup remain in the archive for a few days past its expected expiration date If the schedule starts with a daily or a weekly backup a full backup is created instead Examples Each day of the past week each week of the past month Let us consider a GFS backup scheme that many may find useful e Back up files every da
97. The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately 6 11 6 5 Change volume label The volume label is an optional attribute It is a name assigned to a volume for easier recognition For example one volume could be called SYSTEM a volume with an operating system or PROGRAM an application volume DATA a data volume etc but it does not imply that only the type of data stated with the label could be stored on such a volume In Windows volume labels are shown in the Explorer disk and folder tree LABEL1 C LABEL2 D LABEL3 E etc LABEL1 LABEL2 and LABEL3 are volume labels A volume label is shown in all application dialog boxes for opening and saving files If you need to change a volume label 1 Right click on the selected volume and then click Change label 2 Enter anew label in the Change label window text field 3 By clicking OK in the Change label window you ll add the pending operation of changing the volume label If when setting a new volume label you use characters that are unsupported by the currently installed operating system you will get the appropriate warning and the OK button will be disabled You will have to use only supported characters to proceed with changing the volume label To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 205 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new
98. Tower of Hanoi scheme is used it is not possible to change the number of levels In all other cases the scheme can be changed and should continue to operate as if existing archives were created by a new scheme For empty archives all changes are possible Why can t edit the backup plan e The backup plan is currently running Editing of the currently running backup plan is impossible e Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot edit plans owned by other users e The backup plan has a centralized origin Direct editing of centralized backup plans is not possible You need to edit the original backup policy Why can t I edit the task e Task belongs to a backup plan Only tasks that do not belong to a backup plan such as a recovery task can be modified by direct editing When you need to modify a task belonging to a local backup plan edit the backup plan A task belonging to a centralized backup plan can be modified by editing the centralized policy that spawned the plan Only the management server administrator can do so e Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot modify tasks owned by other users Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 109 Delete a plan task Refresh table Backup plan Click x Delete What will happen if delete the backup plan The plan s deletion deletes all its t
99. UB boot loader or adds the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager item to GRUB s menu if you have GRUB If the system fails to boot you will be able to start the bootable rescue utility by pressing F11 or by selecting it from the menu respectively The system disk or the boot partition in Linux should have at least 70 MB of free space to activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Unless you use the GRUB boot loader and it is installed in the Master Boot Record MBR Acronis Startup Recovery Manager activation overwrites the MBR with its own boot code Thus you may need to reactivate third party boot loaders if they are installed Under Linux when using a boot loader other than GRUB such as LILO consider installing it to a Linux root or boot partition boot record instead of the MBR before activating ASRM Otherwise reconfigure the boot loader manually after the activation Do not activate Disables boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager or the menu item in GRUB If Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is not activated you will need one of the following to recover the system when it fails to boot Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 173 e boot the machine from a separate bootable rescue media e use network boot from Acronis PXE Server or Microsoft Remote Installation Services RIS See the Bootable media p 174 section for details 6 10 Bootable media Bootable media Bootable media is ph
100. Use the task credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section o Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 8 Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is a secure partition that enables keeping backup archives on a managed machine disk space and therefore recovery of a disk to the same disk where the backup resides Certain Windows applications such as Acronis disk management tools can access the zone To learn more about the advantages and limitations of the Acronis Secure Zone see the Acronis Secure Zone p 38 topic in the Proprietary Acronis technologies section Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 169 6 8 1 Creating Acronis Secure Zone You can create
101. VM volume backup to a basic MBR disk Such system cannot boot because its kernel tries to mount the root file system at the LVM volume Solution Change the loader configuration and etc fstab so that the LVM is not used and reactivate the boot loader 6 3 11 1 How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration Generally you should refer to the boot loader manual pages for the appropriate procedure There is also the corresponding Knowledge Base article on the Acronis Web site The following is an example of how to reactivate GRUB in case the system disk volume is recovered to identical hardware 1 Start Linux or boot from the bootable media and then press CTRL ALT F2 2 Mount the system you are recovering mkdir mnt system mount t ext3 dev sda2 mnt system root partition mount t ext3 dev sdal mnt system boot boot partition 3 Mount the proc and dev file systems to the system you are recovering mount t proc none mnt system proc mount o bind dev mnt system dev 4 Save a copy of the GRUB menu file by running one of the following commands cp mnt system boot grub menu 1lst mnt system boot grub menu 1st backup or cp mnt system boot grub grub conf mnt system boot grub grub conf backup 5 Edit the mnt system boot grub menu lst file for Debian Ubuntu and SUSE Linux distributions or the mnt system boot grub grub conf file for Fedora and Red Hat Enterprise Linux distributions for example as follow
102. a tmp bak To specify which files and folders to exclude Set up any of the following parameters e Exclude all hidden files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the Hidden attribute If a folder is Hidden all of its contents including files that are not Hidden will be excluded e Exclude all system files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the System attribute If a folder is System all of its contents including files that are not System will be excluded You can view file or folder attributes in the file folder properties or by using the attrib command For more information refer to the Help and Support Center in Windows e Exclude files matching the following criteria Select this check box to skip files whose names match any of the criteria called file masks in the list use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks You can use one or more wildcard characters and ina file mask The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt Exclusion examples By name File1 log Excludes all files named File1 log
103. a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right location the table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 6 4 5 Access credentials for source Specify the credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive is stored To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Use the task credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the task account specified in the General section o Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the task account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a
104. a when the previous one is full Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 63 Fixed size Enter the desired file size or select it from the drop down list The backup will then be split into multiple files of the specified size This comes in handy when creating a backup that you plan to burn to multiple CDs or DVDs later on You might also want to split the backup destined to an FTP server since data recovery directly from an FTP server requires the backup to be split into files no more than 2GB in size 3 3 1 14 File level security These options are effective only for file level backup in Windows operating systems In archives store encrypted files in a decrypted state This option defines whether to decrypt files before saving them to a backup archive The preset is Disabled Simply ignore this option if you do not use the encryption Enable the option if encrypted files are included in the backup and you want them to be accessed by any user after recovery Otherwise only the user who encrypted the files folders will be able to read them Decryption may also be useful if you are going to recover encrypted files on a different machine File encryption is available in Windows using the NTFS file system with the Encrypting File System EFS To access a file or folder encryption setting select Properties gt General gt Advanced Attributes gt Encrypt contents to secure data Preserve file security settings in archives This opti
105. ackup amp Recovery 10 agents operating on the managed machine and so the options are considered machine specific To access the machine options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Machine options from the top menu 3 2 1 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events generated by the agent s operating on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers If you do not modify the event tracing options anywhere except for here your settings will be effective for each local backup plan and each task created on the machine You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events occurred during backup or during recovery see Default backup and recovery options p 49 In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific Bue edi Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run event
106. ackup and recovery validating archives resizing and deleting the zone To set up a password 1 Choose Use password 2 Inthe Enter the password field type a new password 3 Inthe Confirm the password field re type the password 4 Click OK To disable password 1 Choose Do not use 2 Click OK 6 8 1 4 Result confirmation The Result confirmation window displays the expected partition layout according to the settings you have chosen Click OK if you are satisfied with the layout and the Acronis Secure Zone creation will start How the settings you make will be processed This helps you to understand how creating the Acronis Secure Zone will transform a disk containing multiple volumes e Acronis Secure Zone is always created at the end of the hard disk When calculating the final layout of the volumes the program will first use unallocated space at the end e f there is no or not enough unallocated space at the end of the disk but there is unallocated space between volumes the volumes will be moved to add more unallocated space to the end e When all unallocated space is collected but it is still not enough the program will take free space from the volumes you select proportionally reducing the volumes size Resizing of locked volumes requires a reboot e However there should be free space on a volume so that the operating system and applications can operate for example for creating temporary files The progr
107. ackup task run has higher priority put the task on hold for the specified time interval If the time interval lapses and the conditions are still not met run the task anyway With this setting the program will automatically handle the situation when the conditions are not met for too long and further delaying the backup is undesirable e backup task start time matters skip the backup task if the conditions are not met at the time when the task should be started Skipping the task run makes sense when you need to back up data strictly at the specified time especially if the events are relatively often Adding multiple conditions Multiple conditions must be met simultaneously to enable task execution Example It is required to run the backup task after free space on the managed machine is changed by at least 1 GB but only if all users are logged off and more than 12 hours have passed since the last backup Set the schedule conditions and the Task start conditions backup option as follows e Schedule When free space changed Value Run task if free space has changed by at least 1 GB e Condition User logged off Value Run the task on schedule only if all users are logged off e Condition Time since last backup Value Time since the last backup 12 hour s e Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met If the free space changes by more than 1 GB the scheduler will wait until both conditions are met at the same time a
108. action forwards you to the Pending Operations window where you will be able to view the pending operation list Clicking Proceed will launch their execution You will not be able to undo any actions or operations after you choose the Proceed operation You can also cancel the commitment by clicking Cancel Then no changes will be done to the pending operation list Quitting Acronis Disk Director Lite without committing the pending operations effectively cancels them so if you try to exit Disk management without committing the pending operations you will receive the appropriate warning 6 12 Collecting system information The system information collection tool gathers information about the machine to which the management console is connected and saves it to a file You may want to provide this file when contacting Acronis technical support This option is available under bootable media To collect system information 1 Inthe management console under Tools click Collect system information 2 Specify where to save the file with system information Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 205 Glossary A Acronis Active Restore The Acronis proprietary technology that brings a system online immediately after the system recovery is started The system boots from the backup p 212 and the machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest prior
109. agement functions Its pages will enable you to enter operation parameters proceeding step by step further on and return to any previous step if necessary to change any previously selected options To help you with your choices each parameter is supplemented with detailed instructions If you want to create a volume Run the Create volume wizard by selecting Create volume on the Wizards bar or right click any unallocated space and select Create volume in the appearing context menu Select the type of volume being created At the first step you have to specify the type of volume you want to create The following types of volume are available e Basic e Simple Spanned e Striped e Mirrored e RAID 5 You will obtain a brief description of every type of volume for better understanding of the advantages and limitations of each possible volume architecture If the current operating system installed on this machine does not support the selected type of volume you will receive the appropriate warning In this case the Next button will be disabled and you will have to select another type of volume to proceed with the new volume creation After you click the Next button you will proceed forward to the next wizard page Select destination disks p 200 Select destination disks The next wizard page will prompt you to choose the disks whose space will be used for the volume creation To create a basic volume o Select a destin
110. ake you to Create a Backup Plan page where you can instantly configure and run the backup operation To configure the time interval that is considered as critical select Options gt Console options gt Time based alerts Activities The calendar lets you explore the history of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent s activities on the machine Right click on any highlighted date and select View log to see the list of log entries filtered by date On the View section at the right of the calendar you can select the activities to highlight depending on the presence and severity of the errors How it is determined Highlight the date in red if at least one Error entry appeared in the log on this date Highlight the date in yellow if no Error entries appeared and at least one Warning entry appeared in the log on this date Highlight the date in green if only Information log entries appeared on this date normal activity The Select current date link focuses selection to the current date System view Shows summarized statistics of backup plans tasks and brief information on the last backup Click the items in this section to obtain the relevant information This will take you to the Backup plans and tasks p 103 view with pre filtered plans or tasks For instance if you click Local under Backup plans the Backup plans and tasks view will be opened with backup plans filtered by the Local origin 6 1 1 1 Tasks
111. am will not decrease a volume where free space is or becomes less than 25 of the total volume size Only when all volumes on the disk have 25 or less free space will the program continue decreasing the volumes proportionally As is apparent from the above setting the maximum possible zone size is not advisable You will end up with no free space on any volume which might cause the operating system or applications to work unstably and even fail to start Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 171 6 8 2 Managing Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault p 219 Once created on a managed machine the zone is always present in the list of Personal vaults Centralized backup plans can use Acronis Secure Zone as well as local plans If you have used the Acronis Secure Zone before please note a radical change in the zone functionality The zone does not perform automatic cleanup that is deleting old archives anymore Use backup schemes with automatic cleanup to back up to the zone or delete outdated archives manually using the vault management functionality With the new Acronis Secure Zone behavior you obtain the ability to e list archives located in the zone and backups included in each archive e examine backup content e mounta volume backup to copy files from the backup to a physical disk e safely delete archives and backups from the archives To learn more about operations with vaults see the Va
112. an or appears on the machine as a result of a backup policy p 208 deployment centralized plan p 210 Backup policy Policy A backup plan template created by the management server p 216 administrator and stored on the management server A backup policy contains the same rules as a backup plan but might not explicitly specify what data items to back up Instead selection rules p 217 such as environment variables can be used Because of this flexible selection a backup policy can be centrally applied to multiple machines If a data item is specified explicitly e g dev sda or C Windows the policy will back up this item on each machine where this exact path is found By applying a policy to a group of machines the administrator deploys multiple backup plans with a single action The workflow when using policies is as follows 1 The administrator creates a backup policy 2 The administrator applies the policy to a group of machines or a single machine p 215 208 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 3 The management server deploys the policy to the machines 4 On each machine the agent p 207 installed on the machine finds data items using the selection rules For example if the selection rule is All volumes the entire machine will be backed up 5 On each machine the agent installed on the machine creates a backup plan p 208 using other rules specified by the policy Such backup plan is called a c
113. arameters 112 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Backup plan details The Backup plan details window also duplicated on the Information panel aggregates in four tabs all the information on the selected backup plan The respective message will appear at the top of the tabs if one of the plan s tasks requires user interaction It contains a brief description of the problem and action buttons that let you select the appropriate action or stop the plan Backup plan The Backup plan tab provides the following general information on the selected plan e Name name of the backup plan e Origin whether the plan was created on the managed machine using direct management local origin or appeared on the machine as a result of deploying a backup policy from the management server centralized origin e Policy for backup plans with centralized origin name of the backup policy whose deployment created the backup plan e Account the name of the account under which the plan runs e Owner the name of the user who created or last modified the plan e State execution state p 103 of the backup plan e Status status p 104 of the backup plan e Schedule whether the task is scheduled or set to start manually e Last backup how much time has passed since the last backup e Creation backup plan creation date e Comments description of the plan if provided Source The Source tab provides the following informati
114. asks Why can t delete the backup plan e The backup plan is in the Running state A backup plan cannot be deleted if at least one of its tasks is running e Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator s privileges on the machine a user cannot delete plans owned by other users e The backup plan has a centralized origin A centralized plan can be deleted by the management server administrator by revoking the backup policy that produced the plan Task Click xX Delete Why can t I delete the task e Task belongs to a backup plan A task belonging to a backup plan cannot be deleted separately from the plan Edit the plan to remove the task or delete the entire plan e Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot delete tasks owned by other users o Click Refresh The management console will update the list of backup plans and tasks existing on the machine with the most recent information Though the list is refreshed automatically based on events the data may not be retrieved immediately from the managed machine due to some latency Manual refresh guarantees that the most recent data is displayed Filtering and sorting backup plans and tasks Sort backup plans and tasks by name state status type origin etc Filter plans tasks by name or owner Filter plans and tasks by state status type origin last result sch
115. ata from it Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 17 The following diagram illustrates the notions discussed above For more definitions please refer to the Glossary p a Control Backup Plan 1 F Backup 0 Task 1 F Backup1 Full backup y F Backup 2 Managed Machine Vault Create Backup Plan 2 Task 1 Full backup Bootable media Task 2 Differential backup Task 3 al Incremental backup Task 4 Validate archive O backup 3 Task 5 l Backup 4 F Backup 5 Maintain Cleanup archive archive 18 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Backup using bootable media You can boot the machine using the bootable media configure the backup operation in the same way as a simple backup plan and execute the operation This will help you extract files and logical volumes from a system that failed to boot take an image of the offline system or back up sector by sector an unsupported file system 4 A D Bootable Agent A RAM Archive 1 Console F Backup 0 F Backup 1 F Backup 2 Managed Machine Vault Backup Operation Full backup of Data 2 Recovery under operating system When it comes to data recovery you create a recovery task on the managed machine You specify the vault then select the archive and then select the backup referring to the date and time of the backup creation or more precisely to the time when the creation has started In m
116. ately After the conversion the last 8Mb of disk space is reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic In some cases the possible unallocated space and the proposed maximum volume size might differ e g when the size of one mirror establishes the size of the other mirror or the last 8Mb of disk space are reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic System disk conversion Acronis Disk Director Lite does not require an operating system reboot after dynamic to basic conversion of the disk if 1 There is a single Windows 2008 Vista operating system installed on the disk Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 197 2 The machine runs this operating system Dynamic to basic conversion of the disk comprising of system volumes takes a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in bootability loss In contrast to Windows Disk Manager the program ensures e safe conversion of a dynamic disk to basic when it contains volumes with data for simple and mirrored volumes e in multiboot systems bootability of a system that was offline during the operation 6 11 5 7 Changing disk status Changing disk status is effective for Windows Vista SP1 Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 operating systems and applies to the current disk layout p 191 One of the following disk statuse
117. ation Click Change user In the appearing dialog box provide the credentials required for accessing the vault Click 12 Create Acronis Secure Zone The procedure of creating the Acronis Secure Zone is described in depth in the Creating Acronis Secure Zone p 170 section Click Explore In the appearing Explorer window examine the selected vault s content Click validate You will be taken to the Validation p 156 page where this vault is already pre selected as a source The vault validation checks all the archives stored in the vault Click x Delete The deleting operation actually removes only a shortcut to the folder from the Vaults view The folder itself remains untouched You have the option to keep or delete archives contained in the folder Fa Click 7 Refresh While you are reviewing the vault content archives can be added to the vault deleted or modified Click Refresh to update the vault information with the most recent changes Creating a personal vault To create a personal vault In the Name field type a name for the vault being created Optional In the Comments field add a description of the vault In the Path field click Change In the opened Personal Vault Path window specify a path to the folder that will be used as the vault A personal vault can be organized on detachable or removable media on a network share 1 2 3 or on FTP 4 4 1 2 2 Click OK As a result the
118. ation disk and specify the unallocated space to create the basic volume on 200 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 To create a Simple Spanned volume o Select one or more destination disks to create the volume on To create a Mirrored volume o Select two destination disks to create the volume on To create a Striped volume o Select two or more destination disks to create the volume on To create a RAID 5 volume o Select three destination disks to create the volume on After you choose the disks the wizard will calculate the maximum size of the resulting volume depending on the size of the unallocated space on the disks you chose and the requirements of the volume type you have previously decided upon If you are creating a dynamic volume and select one or several basic disks as its destination you will receive a warning that the selected disk will be converted to dynamic automatically If need be you will be prompted to add the necessary number of disks to your selection according to the chosen type of the future volume If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Select the type of volume being created p 200 If you click the Next button you will proceed to the next page Set the volume size p 201 Set the volume size On the third wizard page you will be able to define the size of the future volume according to the previously made selections In order to choose the necessa
119. ations with archives and backups stored in the vault A vault can be organized on a local or networked drive detachable media or a tape device attached to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node There are no settings for limiting a vault size or number of backups in a vault You can limit the size of each archive using cleanup but the total size of archives stored in the vault is limited by the storage size only Why create vaults We recommend that you create a vault in each destination where you are going to store backup archives This will ease your work as follows Quick access to the vault You will not have to remember paths to the folders where the archives are stored When creating a backup plan or a task that requires selection of an archive or an archive destination place the list of vaults will be available for quick access without drilling down through the folders tree Easy archive management A vault is available for access from the Navigation pane Having selected the vault you can browse the archives stored there and perform the following archive management operations e geta list of backups included in each archive e recover data from a backup e examine backup content e validate all archives in the vault or individual archives or backups e mount a volume backup to copy files from the backup to a physical disk e safely delete archives and backups from the archives Creating vaults is highly recommended
120. backups lifetime and the archive size The diagram below illustrates the resulting rule lt _ YN Deolete backups older than Never delete _ backups younger than ie a 4 4 4 4 4 l g De ete if the a plg Do not delete p archive size is exceeded i Example Delete backups older than 3 Months Keep the archive size within 200GB Never delete backups younger than 10 Days e Every time the retention rules are applied the program will delete all backups created more than 3 months or more exactly 90 days ago e If after the deletion the archive size is more than 200GB and the oldest backup is older than 10 days the program will delete that backup e Then if necessary the next old backup will be deleted until the archive size decreases to the preset limit or the oldest backup age reaches 10 days Deleting backups with dependencies Both retention rules presume deleting some backups while retaining the others What if the archive contains incremental and differential backups that depend on each other and on the full backups they are based on You cannot say delete an outdated full backup and keep its incremental children When deletion of a backup affects other backups one of the following rules is applied 32 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 e Retain the backup until all dependent backups become subject to deletion The outdated backup wi
121. bility can be recovered automatically only when the GRUB resides in the first several sectors of the disk and on the file system to which direct access is possible In other cases the user has to manually reactivate the boot loader Solution Reactivate the boot loader You might also need to fix the configuration file e The system uses Linux Loader LILO and was recovered from a normal not from a raw that is sector by sector backup LILO contains numerous references to absolute sector numbers and so cannot be repaired automatically except for the case when all data is recovered to the sectors that have the same absolute numbers as on the source disk Solution Reactivate the boot loader You might also need to fix the loader configuration file for the reason described in the previous item Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 153 e The system loader points to the wrong volume This may happen when system or boot volumes are not recovered to their original location Solution Modification of the boot ini or the boot bcd files fixes this for Windows loaders Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 does this automatically and so you are not likely to experience the problem For the GRUB and LILO loaders you will need to correct the GRUB configuration files If the number of the Linux root partition has changed it is also recommended that you change etc fstab so that the SWAP volume can be accessed correctly e Linux was recovered from an L
122. ble 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden 6 1 3 3 Log entry details Displays detailed information on the log entry you have selected and lets you copy the details to the clipboard To copy the details click the Copy to clipboard button Log entry data fields A local log entry contains the following data fields e Type type of event Error Warning Information e Date date and time of the event occurrence e Backup plan the backup plan the event relates to if any e Task the task the event relates to if any e Code the program code of the event Every type of event in the program has its own code A code is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem e Module number of the program module where the event has occurred It is an integer number that may be used by Acronis support service to solve the problem e Owner user name of the backup plan owner only under operating system e Message a text description of the event The log entry s details that you copy will have the appearance as follows Log Entry Details Type Information Date and time DD MM YYYY HH MM SS Backup plan Backup plan name Task Task name Message Description of the operation Code 12 3x45678A Module Module name Owner Owner of the plan Date and time presentation varies depending on your locale settings 6 2 Creati
123. ble the volumes snapshots will be taken one after the other As a result if the data spans across several volumes the resulting backup may be not consistent JLT Volume Shadow Copy Service This option is effective only for Windows operating systems The option defines whether a Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS provider either Acronis VSS or Microsoft VSS has to notify VSS aware applications that the backup is about to start This ensures the consistent state of all data used by the applications in particular completion of all database transactions at the moment of taking the data snapshot by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Data consistency in turn ensures that the application will be recovered in the correct state and become operational immediately after recovery The preset is Create snapshots using VSS Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will select the VSS provider automatically based on the operating system running on the machine and whether the machine is a member of an Active Directory domain Create snapshots without using VSS Choose this option if your database is incompatible with VSS The data snapshot will be taken by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Backup process is fastest but data consistency of the applications whose transactions are not completed at the time of taking a snapshot cannot be guaranteed You may use Pre Post data capture commands p 54 to indicate which commands should be performed before and af
124. ble components and perform operations that require reboot using bootable media Acronis Bootable Media Builder is a dedicated tool for creating bootable media p 209 The media builder can create bootable media based on either Windows Preinstallation Environment or Linux kernel The Universal Restore add on enables you to use the restore to dissimilar hardware functionality on the machine where the agent is installed and create bootable media with this functionality Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for Windows start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset 14 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 1 3 3 Management Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console is an administrative tool for local access to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent 1 4 Supported operating systems Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console e Windows 2000 Professional SP4 XP Home Editions XP Professional SP2 e Windows 2000 Server 2000 Advanced Server Server 2003 Server 2008 e Windows SBS 2003 SBS 2008 e Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 2008 x64 Editions e Windows Vista all editions e Windows 7 all editions Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows e Windows 2000 Professional SP4 XP Home Editions XP Professional SP2 e Windows XP Professional x64 Edition e Windows Vista all editions e Windows 7 all editions Remote connection to t
125. c 2000 2009 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 remembers the changes you made on the action pages For example if you started to create a backup plan and then for any reason switched to another view without accomplishing the plan creation you can click the Back navigation button on the menu Or if you have passed several steps forward click the Down arrow and select the page where you started the plan creation from the list Thus you can perform the remaining steps and accomplish the backup plan creation 75 gt 93 Connect v Actions Start page Machine start page Create backup plan Create personal vault ls Vv Machine log Machine dashboard Navigation buttons 1 3 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components This section contains a list of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components with a brief description of their functionality Components for a managed machine agents These are applications that perform data backup recovery and other operations on the machines managed with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agents require a license to perform operations on each managed machine Agents have multiple features or add ons that enable additional functionality and so might require additional licenses With bootable media builders you can create bootable media in order to use the agents and other rescue utilities in a rescue environment Availability of the agent add ons in a rescue environment depends on whe
126. ccess it To access this option select the Advanced view check box Where to recover This section appears after the required backup is selected and the type of data to recover is defined The parameters you specify here depend on the type of data being recovered Disks p 142 Volumes p 144 Acronis Active Restore OPTIONAL The Acronis Active Restore check box is available when recovering Windows starting from Windows 2000 Acronis Active Restore brings a system online immediately after the recovery is started The operating system boots from the backup image and the machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background See Acronis Active Restore p 41 for details Files p 148 You may have to specify credentials for the destination Skip this step when operating on a machine booted with bootable media Access credentials p 149 Optional Provide credentials for the destination if the task credentials do not enable recovery of the selected data To access this option select the Advanced view check box When to recover Recover p 150 Select when to start recovery The task can start immediately after its creation be scheduled for a specified date and time in the future or simply saved for manual execution Optional Acronis Universal Restore Applies to Windows OS an
127. ccess this option select the Advanced view check box If the target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as RAID especially NVIDIA RAID or a fibre channel adapter specify the appropriate drivers in the Drivers field The drivers defined here will have priority They will be installed with appropriate warnings even if the program finds a better driver Use this option only if the automatic drivers search does not help to boot the system Drivers for a virtual machine When recovering a system to a new virtual machine the Universal Restore technology is applied in the background because the program knows what drivers are required for the supported virtual machines When recovering the system to an existing virtual machine that uses SCSI hard drive controller be sure to specify SCSI drivers for the virtual environment in the Mass storage drivers to install anyway step Use drivers bundled with your virtual machine software or download the latest drivers versions from the software manufacturer Web site 6 3 10 How to convert a disk backup to a virtual machine Rather than converting a TIB file to a virtual disk file which requires additional operations to bring the virtual disk into use Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 performs the conversion by recovery of a disk backup to a fully configured and operational new virtual machine You have the ability to adapt the virtual machine configuration to your needs when configuring
128. chedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the plan creation o Use the following credentials The tasks will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the Users privileges ona managed machine p 23 section Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 119 6 2 3 Source type Select the type of data you want to be backed up on the managed machine The list of available data types depends on the agents running on the machine Files Available if the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or for Linux is installed Select this option to back up specific files and folders If you are not concerned about recovery of the operating system along with all the settings and applications but plan to keep safe only certain data the current project for example choose file backup This will reduce the archive size thus saving storage space Disks volumes Available if the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or for Linux is installed Select this option to back up disks and or volumes To be able to back up disks or volumes you must have A
129. chine belong The typical community is public To disable sending SNMP messages clear the Send messages to SNMP server check box The messages are sent over UDP The next section contains additional information about Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine p 48 3 2 1 3 Setting up SNMP services on the receiving machine Windows To install the SNMP service on a machine running Windows Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs gt Add Remove Windows Components Select Management and Monitoring Tools 1 2 3 Click Details 4 Select the Simple Network Management Protocol check box 5 Click OK You might be asked for Immib2 dll that can be found on the installation disc of your operating system Linux To receive SNMP messages on a machine running Linux the net snmp for RHEL and SUSE or the snmpd for Debian package has to be installed SNMP can be configured using the snmpconf command The default configuration files are located in the etc snmp directory e etc snmp snmpd conf configuration file for the Net SNMP SNMP agent e etc snmp snmptrapd conf configuration file for the Net SNMP trap daemon 3 2 2 Log cleanup rules This option specifies how to clean up the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent log This option defines the maximum size of the agent log folder in Windows XP 2003 Server ALLUSERSPROFILE Application Data Acronis BackupAndRecovery MMS LogEvents The p
130. ciis eran ceeds oceteds cceecccaccevscececcesdeccensececcedestacccdescadcedcesccedestaccewescacsedessece 44 GONSOlE OPTIONS EEEE E EE ened esa EE E A catdecdrs ate A E A vhcsaveedes 44 Sta ARETE Page EEA A E E A A 44 Pop p message Suini aaiae aiaee aAa ea E E AEA a A cae ecg Mev hes be os 44 TIME DaSed Alerts iescsecers asin sland ioe apenas ees el tit ee Tie A 45 INUIMD OOF TASKS AEAEE AAEE EEA AN 45 ONA EE AE E OA E E TA 46 Machine OPtiONSieosren itan n n e a a a A E A A A G E 46 Event TRACING recoseineiieniosi a i a i e i e i a Eii a Ei ETA a 46 logclean p rulei ceea irai a a a e a aa e t EE 48 Default backup and recovery OPtiONS ccccccccccsssssessssecececesseseceseeeeseessessaaeeeceeesusseseeaeees 49 D fa lt backup Options sinusa e a and E A a e E a i 49 Default recovery Op ONS a a a A E a a a araea a kaaria 70 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 2 5 5 3 5 5 4 5 5 5 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 2 5 6 2 6 6 2 7 6 2 8 6 2 9 6 2 10 6 2 11 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 8 6 3 9 6 3 10 6 3 11 6 4 AETI EAEE EEA EEE AEAEE EE EEE 80 Perso alvatlts ineert ia ieetccn tevtasactatenas ct vtastaces sca dut odaata otesssedveds e aa EE 81 Working with the Personal vault ViQW cccccccccscsscsscsscssesesssssesscsscsecssesessesseseesscese
131. commit p 205 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Please note A GPT partitioned disk reserves the space in the end of the partitioned area necessary for the backup area which stores copies of the GPT header and the partition table If the disk is full and the volume size cannot be automatically decreased the conversion operation of the MBR disk to GPT will fail The operation is irreversible If you have a primary volume belonging to an MBR disk and convert the disk first to GPT and then back to MBR the volume will be logical and will not be able to be used as a system volume If you plan to install an OS that does not support GPT disks the reverse conversion of the disk to MBR is also possible through the same menu items the name of the operation will be listed as Convert to MBR Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 195 Dynamic disk conversion MBR to GPT Acronis Disk Director Lite does not support direct MBR to GPT conversion for dynamic disks However you can perform the following conversions to reach the goal using the program 1 MBR disk conversion dynamic to basic p 197 using the Convert to basic operation 2 Basic disk conversion MBR to GPT using the Convert to GPT operation 3 GPT disk conversion basic to dynamic p 196 using the Convert to dynamic operation 6 11 5 4 Disk conversion GPT to MBR If you plan to install an OS that does not support GPT
132. contiguous hold down CTRL and click the log entries one by one entries e contiguous select a single log entry then hold down SHIFT and click another entry All the entries between the first and last selections will be selected too 114 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 View a log entry s details Save the selected log entries to a file Save all the log entries to a file Save all the filtered log entries to a file Delete all the log entries 6 1 3 2 Select a log entry Do one of the following Click View Details The log entry s details will be displayed in a separate window Expand the Information panel by clicking the chevron Select a single log entry or multiple log entries Click E4 Save Selected to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file Make sure that the filters are not set Click A Save All to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file Set filters to get a list of the log entries that satisfy the filtering criteria Click A Save All to File In the opened window specify a path and a name for the file As a result the log entries of that list will be saved Click a Clear Log All the log entries will be deleted from the log and a new log entry will be created It will contain information about who deleted the entries and when Filtering and sorting log entries The following is a guideline for you to filter and sor
133. ctive of the task if the command command execution result execution fails Post backup command To specify a command executable file to be executed after the backup is completed 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command execution arguments if required 4 If successful execution of the command is critical for your backup strategy select the Fail the task if the command execution fails check box In case the command execution fails the program will remove the resulting TIB file and temporary files if possible and the task will fail When the check box is not selected the command execution result does not affect the task execution failure or success You can track the command execution result by exploring the log or the errors and warnings displayed on the Dashboard 5 Click Test Command to check if the command is correct 3 3 1 4 Pre Post data capture commands This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems The option enables you to define the commands to be automatically executed before and after data capture that is taking the data snapshot performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 at the beginning of the backup procedure The following scheme illustrates when the pre post data capture commands are executed l
134. d Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is available when a location on the network network share managed vault or an FTP SFTP server is selected as the backup destination The option defines the amount of network connection bandwidth allocated for transferring the backup data By default the speed is set to maximum i e the software uses all the network bandwidth it can get when transferring the backup data Use this option to reserve a part of the network bandwidth to other network activities The preset is Maximum To set the network connection speed for backup Do any of the following e Click Transferring speed stated as a percentage of the estimated maximum speed of the network connection and then drag the slider or type a percentage in the box Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 59 e Click Transferring speed stated in kilobytes per second and then enter the bandwidth limit for transferring backup data in kilobytes per second 3 3 1 10 Notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the ability of notifying users about backup completion through e mail or the messaging service E mail This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option enables you to receive e mail notifications about the backup task s successful completion failure or need for interaction along with the full log of the task
135. d by deleting the expired backups and keeping the most recent backups of each level Custom to create a custom scheme where you are free to set up a backup strategy in the way your enterprise needs it most specify multiple schedules for different backup types add conditions and specify the retention rules 6 2 9 1 Back up now scheme With the Back up now scheme the backup will be performed immediately right after you click the OK button at the bottom of the page In the Backup type field select whether you want to create a full incremental or differential backup p 21 6 2 9 2 Back up later scheme With the Back up later scheme the backup will be performed only once at the date and time you specify Specify the appropriate settings as follows Backup type Select the type of backup full incremental or differential If there is no full backup in the archive a full backup will be created regardless of your selection Date and time Specify when to start the backup The task will be Select this check box if you do not need to put the backup task on a schedule and wish started manually to start it manually afterwards Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 125 6 2 9 3 Simple scheme With the simple backup scheme you just schedule when and how often to back up data and set the retention rule At the first time a full backup will be created The next backups will be incremental To set up the simple backup scheme s
136. d create the recovery task If the managed machine s operating system fails to start or you need to recover data to bare metal boot the machine from the bootable media p 209 or using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 39 Then create a recovery task Acronis Universal Restore p 40 lets you recover and boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine A Windows system can be brought online in seconds while it is still being recovered Using the proprietary Acronis Active Restore p 41 technology Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will boot the machine into the operating system found in the backup as if the system were on the physical disk The system becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services Thus the system downtime will be minimal A dynamic volume can be recovered over an existing volume to unallocated space of a disk group or to unallocated space of a basic disk To learn more about recovering dynamic volumes please turn to the Microsoft LDM Dynamic volumes p 33 section Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows has the ability to recover a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance The virtual appliance can then be imported to XenServer The VMware Workstation machine can be converted to the open virtualization format OVF using the VMware OVF tool W
137. d device 2 Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right destination the table on the right displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select in the tree While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 168 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 3 Naming the new archive By default the exported archive inherits the name of the original archive Because having multiple archives of the same names in the same location is not advisable the following actions are disabled with the default archive name e exporting part of an archive to the same location e exporting an archive or part of an archive to a location where an archive of the same name exists e exporting an archive or part of an archive to the same location twice In any of the above cases provide an archive name that is unique to the destination folder or vault If you need to redo the export using the same archive name first delete the archive that resulted from the previous export operation 6 7 6 Access credentials for destination Specify credentials required for access to the location where the resulting archive will be stored The user whose name is specified will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o
138. d differential backups ccecessccececeseesennececeeecessessaeseeeeseessessnaeees 21 User privileges on a managed machine cccccccscesssssssecececessesecnececececessessaeseeeeseessesseaeees 23 Owners and Credentials cccccccccscssssssssecececessesecseaeeececsseesesaeaeeececeseesesasaeeeeecesseseaeaeeeesens 23 GES backup SCM STING saioen ce vaitin aati ua siinne anaana n okt sty gate kinina ierat oana Eai suentistatlan 25 Tower of Hanoi backup SCHEMEC cceccssessssececeeeceesesnsaeceeeceseeseaeaeeeeeessseseaaeaeeeessessessaeees 29 RETENTION AE EEE E E E E E E A EEA E eases E E E eee 31 Backing up dynamic volumes WINGOWS cc cccccsssccceessscececssecececesscececssssecesseasecsessaseees 33 Tape SUPPO n E a even E E acer eee ened 36 NEJE TIAA e eaS E E 36 Using a singletape Clive nenon nn aaia eikai i E R E i i 37 Proprietary Acronis technologies ccccsessssscececessesenneseceeeceseessaeaeeeescesseseaeaeeeeseeseeseaaeas 38 j Nol og ey 1010 1840 e me em Ren NAE SE EP 38 Acronis Startup Recovery Managet scssssssssscsessecesecseeseeseeaeeaeeecseeseeseeseeaeeaeeessaesasseeseeseesecaeeaeeaseaseeeaes 39 Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore c ccccccssssesssscsessescseesessseesees 40 Acronis Active RESto ress icsecectcnsdacescasg acdecddla asesyuecadeodeanncnsgacsiet idea ouee dsusdedcasdeupanestesehisvlsavdessandudeestioeivestvaes 41 OPPIONS s
139. d system volume recovery Universal Restore p 150 138 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Use the Acronis Universal Restore when you need to recover and boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware Automatic drivers search Specify where the program should search for HAL mass storage and network adapter drivers Acronis Universal Restore will install drivers that better fit the target hardware Mass storage drivers to install anyway Optional Specify the mass storage drivers manually if the automatic drivers search has not found the appropriate drivers To access this option select the Advanced view check box Recovery options Settings Optional Customize the recovery operation by configuring the recovery options such as pre post recovery commands recovery priority error handling or notification options If you do nothing in this section the default values p 70 will be used After any of the settings is changed against the default value a new line that displays the newly set value appears The setting status changes from Default to Custom Should you modify the setting again the line will display the new value unless the new value is the default one When the default value is set the line disappears and so you always see only the settings that differ from the default values in the Settings section Clicking Reset to default resets all the settings to default values After you complete all the required steps click OK t
140. d the date time when the file was last saved Restart the machine automatically after backup is finished This option is available only when operating under bootable media The preset is Disabled When the option is enabled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will restart the machine after the backup process is completed For example if the machine boots from a hard disk drive by default and you select this check box the machine will be restarted and the operating system will start as soon as the bootable agent has finished creating the backup Deduplicate backup only after transferring it to the vault do not deduplicate at source This option is available only in advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media when the backup destination is a deduplicating vault Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 69 The preset is Disabled Enabling this option turns off deduplicating backups at source meaning that deduplication will be performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node after the backup is saved to the vault this is called deduplication at target Turning off deduplication at source may lead to faster backup processes but greater network traffic and heavier load of the storage node The eventual size of the backup in the vault is independent of whether deduplication at source is turned on Deduplication at source and dedupl
141. d the second task s recurrences is 4 hours and between the third fourth and fifth is 2 hours In this case the optimal way is to add two schedules to the task First daily schedule 1 Every 3 day s 2 Every 4 hours From 08 00 00 AM Until 12 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 09 20 2009 To not set Second daily schedule 1 Every 3 day s 2 Every 2 hour s From 03 00 00 PM Until 07 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 09 20 2009 To not set 5 2 Weekly schedule Weekly schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a weekly schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Every lt gt week s on Specify a certain number of weeks and the days of the week you want the lt gt task to be run For example with the Every 2 week s on Mon setting the task will be performed on Monday of every other week In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be run during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to be run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule w
142. ded with lists of specific help topics 124 3 Operations with panes How to expand minimize panes By default the Navigation pane appears expanded and the Actions and Tools minimized You might need to minimize the pane in order to free some additional workspace To do this click the chevron l for the Navigation pane l for the Actions and tools pane The pane will be minimized and the chevron changes its direction Click the chevron once again to expand the pane How to change the panes borders 1 Point to the pane s border 2 When the pointer becomes a double headed arrow drag the pointer to move the border The management console remembers the way the panes borders are set When you run the management console next time all the panes borders will have the same position that was set previously 10 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 1 2 1 4 Main area views and action pages The main area is a basic place where you work with the console Here you create edit and manage backup plans policies tasks and perform other operations The main area displays different views and action pages according the items you select in the menu Navigation tree or on the Actions and Tools pane Views A view appears on the main area when clicking any item in the Navigation tree in the Navigation pane p 8 Comeected to This Machine Local Connection Check the health of the beckup pirs and tack editing on the machine
143. dencies are marked pink The initial full backup will be deleted as soon as all differential and incremental backups based on this backup are deleted So i fv a St vo a a Jv ve ne i Total 1 i hedde D D D D WwW DD0DDDw___ bpp WD DDDM_ Mon F Tue F Il We F I l Tu F I I Fi F l l Of S amp a F lI lt Of Sn F lI I 1 D Mon F I I O T Te F i fe II We F l fe l ll Tu F DWS si ll Fi F ws l t t I Df Sa F bit I i l I O Sun F Dif g 1 I Dif Mon F Dif 1 i ot I Of Tue F Dif EEA i i of Io We F Dif 1 tt it or roto Tu F Dif Dif T E Fi F Dif I l l Dif Sa F Dif I l l Dif Sn F Dif I ot l Dif Mon F Dif l li I Of i Tue F Dif 1 toto Off Il We F Dif if i D O Tu F Dif Dif a a Fi F Dif O a D E Sa F Dif III II F An archive created according to the GFS scheme by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly Friday Keep daily backups 7 days Keep weekly backups 2 weeks Keep monthly backups 6 months 28 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 2 6 Tower of Hanoi backup scheme The need to have frequent backups always conflicts with the cost of keeping such backups for a long time The Tower of Hanoi ToH backup scheme is a useful compromise Tower of Hanoi overview The Tower of Hanoi scheme is based on a mathematical puzzle of the same name In the puzzle a series of rings are stacked in size order the largest on the bottom on one of three
144. details To be able to create or modify PE 2 x images install Bootable Media Builder on a machine where Windows Automated Installation Kit AIK is installed The further operations are described in the Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x p 181 section If you do not have a machine with WAIK prepare as follows 1 Download and install Windows Automated Installation Kit WAIK Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista PE 2 0 http www microsoft com Downloads details aspx familyid C7 D4BC6D 15F3 4284 9123 679830D629F2 amp displaylang en Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 175 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 94bb6e34 d890 4932 81a5 5b50c657de08 amp DisplayLang en 2 optional Burn the WAIK to DVD or copy to a flash drive 3 Install the Microsoft NET Framework v 2 0 from this kit NETFXx86 or NETFXx64 depending on your hardware 4 Install Microsoft Core XML MSXML 5 0 or 6 0 Parser from this kit 5 Install Windows AIK from this kit 6 Install Bootable Media Builder on the same machine It is recommended that you familiarize yourself with the help documentation supplied with Windows AIK To access the documentation select Microsoft Windows AIK gt Documentation from the start menu Using Bart PE You can create a Bart PE image with Acronis Plug in using the Bart PE Builder Please re
145. dia Once a machine boots from bootable media the machine terminal displays a startup window with the IP address es obtained from DHCP or set according to the pre configured values Remote connection To connect to the machine remotely select Connect gt Manage a remote machine in the console menu and specify one of the machine s IP addresses Provide the user name and password if these have been configured when creating the bootable media Local connection Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console is always present on the bootable media Anyone who has physical access to the machine terminal can run the console and connect Just click Run management console in the bootable agent startup window 6 10 3 Working under bootable media Operations on a machine booted with bootable media are very similar to backup and recovery under the operating system The difference is as follows 1 Disk letters seen under Windows style bootable media might differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D drive under the rescue utility might correspond to the E drive in Windows Be careful To be on the safe side it is advisable to assign unique names to the volumes 2 The Linux style bootable media shows local disks and volumes as unmounted sda1 sdaz2 3 The Linux style bootable media cannot write a backup to an NTFS formatted volume Switch to the Windows style if you need to do so 4 You can switch the boo
146. disks conversion of the GPT disk to MBR is possible the name of the operation will be listed as Convert to MBR If you need to convert a GPT disk to MBR 1 Select a GPT disk to convert to MBR 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to MBR in the context menu You will receive a warning window stating that you are about to convert GPT into MBR You will be explained the changes that will happen to the system after the chosen disk is converted from GPT to MBR E g if such conversion will stop a disk from being accessed by the system the operating system will stop loading after such conversion or some volumes on the selected GPT disk will not be accessible with MBR e g volumes located more than 2 TB from the beginning of the disk you will be warned here about such damage Please note a volume belonging to a GPT disk to convert will be a logical one after the operation and is irreversible 3 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of GPT to MBR disk conversion To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 205 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them 6 11 5 5 Disk conversion basic to dynamic You would want to convert a basic disk to dynamic in the following cases e If you plan to use the disk as part of a dynamic disk group e If you want to achieve additional disk reliability for data storage If you need to convert a basic di
147. dition Location s host is available e Task start conditions Skip the task execution As a result 1 If 9 00 PM comes and the location s host is available the backup task starts right on time 2 If 9 00 PM comes but the host is unavailable at the moment the backup task will start on the next workday if the location s host is available 3 If the location s host will never be available on workdays at 9 00 PM the task never starts 5 5 3 Fits time interval Applies to Windows Linux Restricts a backup task s start time to a specified interval 98 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Example A company uses different locations on the same network attached storage for backing up users data and servers The workday starts at 8AM and ends at 5 PM Users data should be backed up as soon as the users log off but not earlier than 4 30 PM and not later than 10 PM Every day at 11 PM the company s servers are backed up So all the users data should be preferably backed up before this time in order to free network bandwidth By specifying the upper limit as 10 PM it is supposed that the backing up of users data does not take more than one hour If a user is still logged on within the specified time interval or logs off at any other time do not back up the users data i e skip task execution e Event When logging off The following user Any user e Condition Fits the time interval from 04 30 00 PM until 10 00 00 PM
148. dministrator or Backup operator privileges Backing up disks and volumes enables you to recover the entire system in case of severe data damage or hardware failure The backup procedure is faster than copying files and may significantly speed up the backup process when it comes to backing up large volumes of data Note for Linux users We recommend that you unmount any volumes that contain non journaling file systems such as the ext2 file system before backing them up Otherwise these volumes might contain corrupted files upon recovery recovery of these volumes with resize might fail 6 2 4 Items to back up The items to backup depend on the source type p 120 selected previously 6 2 4 1 Selecting disks and volumes To specify disks volumes to back up 1 Select the check boxes for the disks and or volumes to back up You can select a random set of disks and volumes If your operating system and its loader reside on different volumes always include both volumes in the backup The volumes must also be recovered together otherwise there is a high risk that the operating system will not start 2 Optional To create an exact copy of a disk or volume on a physical level select the Back up sector by sector check box The resulting backup will be equal in size to the disk being backed up if the Compression level option is set to None Use the sector by sector backup for backing up drives with unrecognized or unsupported file
149. e Having four backups we could recover data as of today yesterday half a week or a week ago 130 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Roll back period The number of days we can go back in the archive is different on different days The minimum number of days we are guaranteed to have is called the roll back period The following table shows full backup and roll back periods for schemes of various levels Number of Full backup On different Roll back levels every days can go period back 2 2 days 1 to 2 days 1 day 3 4 days 2 to 5 days 2 days 4 8 days 4 to 11 days 4 days 5 16 days 8 to 23 days 8 days 6 32 days 16 to 47 days 16 days Adding a level doubles the full backup and roll back periods To see why the number of recovery days varies let us return to the previous example Here are the backups we have on day 12 numbers in gray denote deleted backups A new level 3 differential backup has not yet been created so the backup of day five is still stored Since it depends on the full backup of day one that backup is available as well This enables us to go as far back as 11 days which is the best case scenario The following day however a new third level differential backup is created and the old full backup is deleted This gives us only a four day recovery interval which turns out to be the worst case scenario On day 14 the interval is five days It increases on subsequent days before decreasing again
150. e Task start conditions Skip the task execution As a result 1 if the user logs off between 04 30 00 PM and 10 00 00 PM the backup task will start immediately following the logging off 2 if the user logs off at any other time the task will be skipped What if What if a task is scheduled to be executed at a certain time and this time is outside the specified time interval For example e Event Daily Every 1 day s Once at 03 00 00 PM e Condition Fits time interval from 06 00 00 PM until 11 59 59 PM In this case whether and when the task will run depends on the task start conditions e If the task start conditions are Skip the task execution the task will never run e If the task start conditions are Wait until the conditions are met and the Run the task anyway after check box is cleared the task scheduled to run at 3 00 PM will start at 6 00 PM the time when the condition is met e If the task start conditions are Wait until the conditions are met and the Run the task anyway after check box is selected with say the 1 Hour waiting time the task scheduled to run at 3 00 PM will start at 4 00 PM the time when the waiting period ends 5 5 4 User logged off Applies to Windows Enables to put a backup task run on hold until all users log off from Windows on the managed machine Example Run the backup task at 8 PM on the first and third Friday of every month preferably when all users are logged
151. e administrator can have several copies of the full backup for additional reliability Incremental backup An incremental backup stores changes to the data against the latest backup You need access to other backups from the same archive to recover data from an incremental backup An incremental backup is most useful when e you need the possibility to roll back to any one of multiple saved states e the data changes tend to be small as compared to the total data size It is widely accepted that incremental backups are less reliable than full ones because if one backup in the chain is corrupted the next ones can no longer be used However storing multiple full backups is not an option when you need multiple prior versions of your data because reliability of an oversized archive is even more questionable Example Backing up a database transaction log Differential backup A differential backup stores changes to the data against the latest full backup You need access to the corresponding full backup to recover the data from a differential backup A differential backup is most useful when e you are interested in saving only the most recent data state e the data changes tend to be small as compared to the total data size The typical conclusion is differential backups take longer to do and are faster to restore while incremental ones are quicker to do and take longer to restore In fact there is no physical difference between an
152. e all hidden files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the Hidden attribute If a folder is Hidden all of its contents including files that are not Hidden will be excluded e Exclude all system files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the System attribute If a folder is System all of its contents including files that are not System will be excluded You can view file or folder attributes in the file folder properties or by using the attrib command For more information refer to the Help and Support Center in Windows e Exclude files matching the following criteria Select this check box to skip files whose names match any of the criteria called file masks in the list use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks You can use one or more wildcard characters and ina file mask The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc txt and Document txt The question mark substitutes for exactly one character in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc1 txt and Docs txt but not the files Doc txt or Doc11 txt 148 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Exclusion examples By name File1 log Excludes all files named File1 log By path C Finance test log Excludes the file named test log located in the
153. e asked to provide it All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Archive name actions bar on the Actions and tools pane and from the Archive name actions item of the main menu respectively The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with archives stored in a vault To Do Validate an archive Click validate The Validation p 156 page will be opened with the pre selected archive as a source Validation of an archive will check all the archive s backups Export an archive Click 8 Export The Export p 163 page will be opened with the pre selected archive as a source The export of an archive creates a duplicate of the archive with all its backups in the location you specify Delete a single 1 Select the archive or one of the archives you want to delete archive or multiple archives 2 Click x Delete The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 86 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be select the check boxes for the desired archives then confirm the deletion Delete all archives in Please be aware that if filters have been applied to the vaults list you see only a the vault part of the vault content Be sure that the vault does not contain archives you need to retain before starting the operation Click 4 De
154. e conversion tasks will be queued on that host and it may take considerable time to complete them all What storage will be used for the virtual machines Network usage As opposed to ordinary backups TIB files virtual machine files are transferred uncompressed through the network Therefore using a SAN or a storage local to the host that performs conversion is the best choice from the network usage standpoint A local disk is not an option though if the conversion is performed by the same machine that is backed up Using a NAS also makes good sense Disk space On VMware Infrastructure 3 5 2 new machines are created with pre allocated disks This means that virtual disk size is always equal to the original disk capacity Assuming that the original disk size is 100 GB the corresponding virtual disk will occupy 100 GB even if the disk stores 10 GB of data Virtual machines created on a Hyper V server or workstation type machines VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC or Parallels Workstation use as much disk space as the original data occupies 136 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Since the space is not pre allocated the physical disk on which the virtual machine will run is expected to have sufficient free space for the virtual disks to increase in size 6 3 Recovering data When it comes to data recovery first consider the most functional method connect the console to the managed machine running the operating system an
155. e during backup Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 211 Differential backup A differential backup stores changes to the data against the latest full backup p 214 You need access to the corresponding full backup to recover the data from a differential backup Direct management Any management operation that is performed on a managed machine p 215 using the direct console p 211 agent p 207 connection as opposed to centralized management p 210 when the operations are configured on the management server p 216 and propagated by the server to the managed machines The direct management operations include e creating and managing local backup plans p 215 e creating and managing local tasks p 215 such as recovery tasks e creating and managing personal vaults p 216 and archives stored there e viewing the state progress and properties of the centralized tasks p 210 existing on the machine e viewing and managing the log of the agent s operations e disk management operations such as clone a disk create volume convert volume A kind of direct management is performed when using bootable media p 209 Some of the direct management operations can also be performed via the management server GUI This presumes however either an explicit or an implicit direct connection to the selected machine Disk backup Image A backup p 207 that contains a sector based copy of a disk or a volume in a packaged form
156. e machine the console is connected to On selecting this you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below New virtual machine p 146 If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows is installed The selected volumes will be recovered to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance The virtual machine files will be saved to the destination you specify If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed These agents enable creating a new virtual machine on the virtualization server you specify The new virtual machine will be configured automatically the source machine configuration being copied where possible The configuration is displayed in the Virtual Machine Settings p 147 section Check the settings and make changes if necessary Then you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below Existing virtual machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed On selecting this you specify the virtualization server and the target virtual machine Then you proceed to the regular volume mapping procedure described below Please be aware that the target machine will be powered off automatically before recovery If you prefer to power it off manually modify the VM power management opti
157. e powerful computer will usually produce the same unbootable result because the new hardware is incompatible with the most critical drivers included in the image Using Microsoft System Preparation Tool Sysprep does not solve this problem because Sysprep permits installing drivers only for Plug and Play devices sound cards network adapters video cards etc As for system Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL and mass storage device drivers they must be identical on the source and the target computers see Microsoft Knowledge Base articles 302577 and 216915 The Universal Restore technology provides an efficient solution for hardware independent system recovery by replacing the crucial Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL and mass storage device drivers Universal Restore is applicable for 1 Instant recovery of a failed system on different hardware 2 Hardware independent cloning and deployment of operating systems 3 Physical to physical physical to virtual and virtual to physical machine migration The Universal Restore principles 1 Automatic HAL and mass storage driver selection Universal Restore searches for drivers in the network folders you specify on removable media and in the default driver storage folders of the system being recovered Universal Restore analyzes the compatibility level of all found drivers and installs HAL and mass storage drivers that better fit the target hardware Drivers for network adapters are also sea
158. e s last connection to the management server was more than 5 days ago The alert is displayed in the Alerts section of the Dashboard When the console is connected to the management server this setting will also control the color scheme of the Last connect column s value for each machine 3 1 4 Number of tasks This option is effective only when the console is connected to the management server The option defines how many tasks will be displayed at a time in the Tasks view You can also use filters available in the Tasks view to limit the number of displayed tasks The preset is 400 The adjustment range is 20 to 500 To make a selection choose the desired value from the Number of tasks drop down menu Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 45 3 1 5 Fonts This option is effective when the console is connected to a managed machine or to the management server The option defines the fonts to be used in the Graphical User Interface of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 The Menu setting affects the drop down and context menus The Application setting affects the other GUI elements The preset is System Default font for both the menus and the application interface items To make a selection choose the font from the respective combo box and set the font s properties You can preview the font s appearance by clicking the button to the right 3 2 Machine options The machine options define the general behavior of all Acronis B
159. e same point in time Choose this setting only if these factors are critical that is backing up files without a snapshot does not make sense To use a snapshot the backup plan has to run under the account with the Administrator or Backup Operator privileges If a snapshot cannot be taken the backup will fail Create a snapshot if it is possible Back up files directly if taking a snapshot is not possible Do not create a snapshot Always back up files directly Administrator or Backup Operator privileges are not required Trying to back up files that are opened for exclusive access will result in a read error Files in the backup may be not time consistent Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 3 5 1 0 Multi volume snapshot This option is effective only for Windows operating systems This option applies to disk level backup This option also applies to file level backup when the file level backup is performed by taking a snapshot The File level backup snapshot p 56 option determines whether a snapshot will be taken during file level backup The option determines whether to take snapshots of multiple volumes at the same time or one by one The preset is Enable When this option is set to Enable snapshots of all volumes being backed up will be created simultaneously Use this option to create a time consistent backup of data spanned across multiple volumes for instance for an Oracle database When this option is set to Disa
160. e tape containing the backup you need to recover When creating a recovery task select the tape device from the list of available locations and then select the backup After recovery is started you will be prompted for other tapes if the tapes are needed for recovery 2 40 Proprietary Acronis technologies This section describes the proprietary technologies inherited by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 from Acronis True Image Echo and Acronis True Image 9 1 product families 2 10 1 Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is a secure partition that enables keeping backup archives on a managed machine disk space and therefore recovery of a disk to the same disk where the backup resides Certain Windows applications such as Acronis disk management tools can access the zone Should the disk experience a physical failure the zone and the archives located there will be lost That s why Acronis Secure Zone should not be the only location where a backup is stored In enterprise environments Acronis Secure Zone can be thought of as an intermediate location used for backup when an ordinary location is temporarily unavailable or connected through a slow or busy channel Advantages Acronis Secure Zone e Enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides e Offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error e Being an internal archive storage elim
161. eactivation will disable the boot time prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager or removes the corresponding entry from GRUB s boot menu This means you will need bootable media in case the system fails to boot Limitation Acronis Startup Recovery Manager requires re activation of third party loaders after activation Upgrade from Acronis True Image Echo After upgrade from Acronis True Image Echo to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager appears as deactivated regardless of its status before the upgrade You can activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager again at any time Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 39 2 10 3 Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore is the Acronis proprietary technology that helps recover and boot up Windows on dissimilar hardware or a virtual machine The Universal Restore handles differences in devices that are critical for the operating system start up such as storage controllers motherboard or chipset Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore purpose A system can be easily recovered from a disk backup image onto the same system or to identical hardware However if you change a motherboard or use another processor version a likely possibility in case of hardware failure the recovered system could be unbootable An attempt to transfer the system to a new much mor
162. ect the log entry or log entries to take action on it See the Actions on log entries p 114 section for details e Use the Information panel to review detailed information on the selected log entry The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the chevron The content of the panel is also duplicated in the Log entry details p 116 window Opening the Log with pre filtered log entries Having selected items in other administration views Dashboard Backup plans and tasks you can open the Log view with pre filtered log entries for the item in question Thus you do not have to configure filters in the log table yourself Se AS Dashboard In the calendar right click on any highlighted date and then select View log The Log view appears with the list of log entries already filtered by the date in question Backup plans and Select a backup plan or a task and then click View log The Log view will display tasks a list of the log entries related to the selected plan or task 6 1 3 1 Actions on log entries All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding items on the log toolbar All these operations can also be performed with the context menu by right clicking the log entry or with the Log actions bar on the Actions and tools pane The following is a guideline for you to perform actions on log entries Select a single log Click on it entry Select multiple log non
163. ed to the volume e If you select NO no letter will be assigned to the recovered volume hiding it from the OS You should not assign letters to volumes that are inaccessible to Windows such as to those other than FAT and NTFS 6 3 6 3 Virtual machine type virtualization server selection The new virtual machine can be created either on a virtualization server this requires Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi to be installed or in any accessible local or networked folder 146 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 To select the virtualization server the new virtual machine will be created on 1 Choose the Place on the virtualization server that I select option 2 Inthe left part of the window select the virtualization server Use the right part of the window to review details on the selected server 3 Click OK to return to the Data recovery page To select the type of virtual machine 1 Choose the Save as files of the VM type that I select to the folder that I specify option 2 Inthe left part of the window select the virtual machine type Use the right part of the window to review details on the selected virtual machine type 3 Click OK to return to the Data recovery page 6 3 6 4 Virtual machine settings The following virtual machine settings can be configured Storage Initial setting the default storage of the virtualization server if the new machine is created on the vi
164. edule 110 Click the column s header to sort the backup plans and tasks in ascending order Click it once again to sort the plans and tasks in descending order Type a plan s task s name or an owner s name in the field below the corresponding header name As a result you will see the list of tasks whose names owners names fully or just partly coincide with the entered value In the field below the corresponding header select the required value from the list Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Configuring backup plans and the tasks table By default the table has six columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the displayed columns and show hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to column headers presented in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden Run backup plan The backup plan is considered as running if at least one of its tasks is running The Run backup plan window lets you run the task of the selected backup plan manually in spite of its schedule To run a task of the selected backup plan 1 Select the task of the backup plan you need to run To make certain of your selection check the task information gathered in tabs at the bottom of the window This information is also duplicated in the Task details p 111 window 2 Click OK Temporarily d
165. em and boot volumes and if one of the disks fails the data can still be accessed from the remaining disks Unfortunately the hardware limitations on size and performance are even more severe with the use of mirrored volumes Mirrored Striped Volume A fault tolerant volume also sometimes called RAID 1 0 combining the advantage of the high 1 O speed of the striped layout and redundancy of the mirror type The evident disadvantage remains inherent with the mirror architecture a low disk to volume size ratio Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 199 RAID 5 A fault tolerant volume whose data is striped across an array of three or more disks The disks do not need to be identical but there must be equally sized blocks of unallocated space available on each disk in the volume Parity a calculated value that can be used to reconstruct data in case of failure is also striped across the disk array And it is always stored on a different disk than the data itself If a physical disk fails the portion of the RAID 5 volume that was on that failed disk can be re created from the remaining data and the parity A RAID 5 volume provides reliability and is able to overcome the physical disk size limitations with a higher than mirrored disk to volume size ratio Create volume wizard The Create volume wizard lets you create any type of volume including system and active select a file system label assign a letter and also provides other disk man
166. emental tat Jal lal al fal fal al aoten lel let fel ley SEECREE 3 Differential ERE BEEE EE EEEREEEE NERENN sew As a result of using incremental and differential backups the situation may arise when an old backup deletion must be postponed as it still is a base for other backups The table below indicates the case when deletion of full backup E created at session 1 is postponed at session 17 until session 25 because the differential backup D created at session 9 is still actual In the table all cells with deleted backups are grayed out Eeee eepe en 1 Incremental foot nEn DEN NON NEN NEN ae somen fet tT tT fet tT Tt et Pome ttt tt tT eT TT TT se eee Differential backup D created at session 9 will be deleted at session 25 after creation of a new differential backup is completed This way a backup archive created in accordance with the Tower of Hanoi scheme by Acronis sometimes includes up to two additional backups over the classical implementation of the scheme 30 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 For information about using Tower of Hanoi for tape libraries see Using the Tower of Hanoi tape rotation scheme 2 7 Retention rules The backups produced by a backup plan make an archive The two retention rules described in this section enable you to limit the archive size and set the lifetime retention period of the backups 1 Delete backups older than This is
167. ent 101 206 211 212 215 216 Disk backup Image 135 206 212 215 Disk conversion basic to dynamic 192 196 dynamic to basic 192 196 197 GPT to MBR 192 196 MBR to GPT 192 195 Disk destination 143 Disk group 33 212 214 Disk initialization 192 Disk management 35 137 190 Disk operations 192 Disks 138 142 Disks volumes selection 141 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Drivers for Universal Restore 177 180 Dual destination 38 50 66 Dynamic disk 33 206 212 213 214 Dynamic group 210 213 Dynamic volume 33 209 214 E E mail e 51 60 71 74 Encrypted archive 214 Encrypted vault e 214 218 Error handling 50 65 71 77 Event tracing 46 61 76 Exclusions 117 122 148 149 Export 214 Exporting archives and backups 84 85 163 F Fast incremental differential backup 50 63 File destination 138 148 File level backup snapshot 49 56 57 File level security 50 64 71 74 Files selection 141 Filtering and sorting archives 82 86 Filtering and sorting backup plans and tasks 103 110 Filtering and sorting log entries 114 115 Fits time interval 98 Fonts 46 Format volume 198 204 Full backup 207 209 211 212 215 Full incremental and differential backups 17 21 125 G Getting started 6 GFS Grandfather Father Son 209 215 218 GFS backup scheme 25 215 Copyrigh
168. entifier SID and user profile settings in order to run the system immediately after recovery without re joining the domain or re mapping network user profiles If you are going to change the above settings on a recovered system you can prepare the system with Sysprep image it and recover if need be using the Universal Restore Limitations Universal Restore is not available e when a computer is booted with Acronis Startup Recovery Manager using F11 or e the backup image is located in the Acronis Secure Zone or e when using Acronis Active Restore because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Universal Restore is not available when recovering Linux Getting Universal Restore Universal Restore comes free with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server SBS Edition and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Advanced Server Virtual Edition Universal Restore for the other product editions is purchased separately has its own license and is installed as a separate feature from the setup file You need to re create bootable media to make the newly installed add on operational in the bootable environment 2 10 4 Acronis Active Restore Active Restore is the Acronis proprietary technology that brings a system online immediately after the system recovery is started Customers familiar with Acronis Recovery for Microsoft Exchange can note that this product uses Active Restore to achieve immed
169. entralized plan p 210 6 On each machine the agent installed on the machine creates a set of centralized tasks p 210 that will carry out the plan Backup scheme A part of the backup plan p 208 that includes the backup schedule and optionally the retention rules and the cleanup p 211 schedule For example perform full backup p 214 monthly on the last day of the month at 10 00AM and incremental backup p 215 on Sundays at 10 00PM Delete backups that are older than 3 months Check for such backups every time the backup operation is completed Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the ability to use well known optimized backup schemes such as GFS p 215 and Tower of Hanoi p 218 to create a custom backup scheme or back up data once Bootable agent A bootable rescue utility that includes most of the functionality of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent p 207 Bootable agent is based on Linux kernel A machine p 215 can be booted into a bootable agent using either bootable media p 209 or Acronis PXE Server Operations can be configured and controlled either locally through the GUI or remotely using the console p 211 Bootable media A physical media CD DVD USB flash drive or other media supported by a machine p 215 BIOS as a boot device that contains the bootable agent p 209 or Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE p 220 with the Acronis Plug in for WinPE p 206 A machine can
170. ere the new archive will be created Be sure to provide a distinct name and comment for the new archive Access credentials p 169 Optional Provide credentials for the destination if the task credentials do not have enough privileges to access it To access this option select the Advanced view check box After you have performed all the required steps click OK to start the export task Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 165 6 7 1 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation o Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 see the Owners and credentials p 23 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 23 section
171. ering the volumes to a different machine make sure that the new disk configuration includes enough disks whose sizes are at least those of the original disks To create the volume structure by using the management console 1 Boot the machine from a Linux based bootable media 2 Click Acronis Bootable Agent Then click Run management console 3 Inthe management console click Recover 186 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 4 5 Under the archive contents Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will display a message saying that it detected information about the volume structure Click Details in the area with that message Review the volume structure and then click Apply RAID LVM to create it To create the volume structure by using a script 1 2 3 4 Boot the machine from a Linux based bootable media Click Acronis Bootable Agent Then click Run management console On the toolbar click Actions and then click Start shell Alternatively you can press CTRL ALT F2 Run the restoreraids sh script specifying the full file name of the archive for example bin restoreraids sh smb server backups linux_machine_201 1 02 12 90 123D tib Return to the management console by pressing CTRL ALT F1 or by running the command bin product Click Recover then specify the path to the archive and any other required parameters and then click OK If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 could not create the volume structure
172. ers motherboard or chipset The Universal Restore is not available e when the machine is booted with Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 206 using F11 or e the image being recovered is located in Acronis Secure Zone p 206 or e when using Acronis Active Restore p 206 because these features are primarily meant for instant data recovery on the same machine Universal Restore is not available when recovering Linux Unmanaged vault Any vault p 219 that is not a managed vault p 215 V Validation An operation that checks the possibility of data recovery from a backup p 207 Validation of a file backup imitates recovery of all files from the backup to a dummy destination The previous product versions considered a file backup valid when the metadata contained in its header was consistent The current method is time consuming but much more reliable Validation of a volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup This procedure is also resource intensive While the successful validation means a high probability of successful recovery it does not check all factors that influence the recovery process If you back up the operating system only a test recovery under the bootable media to a spare hard drive can guarantee successful recovery in the future Validation rules A part of the backup plan p 208 Rules that define when and how often to perform validation p 219 and whether to valida
173. es Idle Waiting Running Stopping Need interaction The initial task state is Idle Once the task is started manually or the event specified by the schedule occurs the task enters either the Running state or the Waiting state Running A task changes to the Running state when the event specified by the schedule occurs AND all the conditions set in the backup plan are met AND no other task that locks the necessary resources is running In this case nothing prevents the task from running Waiting A task changes to the Waiting state when the task is about to start but another task using the same resources is already running In particular more than one backup or recovery task cannot run simultaneously on a machine A backup task and a recovery task also cannot run simultaneously Once the other task unlocks the resource the waiting task enters the Running state A task may also change to the Waiting state when the event specified by the schedule occurs but the condition set in the backup plan is not met See Task start conditions p 66 for details Need interaction Any running task can put itself into the Need interaction state when it needs human interaction such as changing media or ignoring a read error The next state may be Stopping if the user chooses to stop the task or Running on selecting Ignore Retry or another action such as Reboot that can put the task to the Running state Stopping The user can stop a running
174. es is disabled you can review the task execution states and results in the Tasks view The preset is Enabled for all results To make a setting for each result successful completion failure or success with warnings individually select or clear the respective check box 3 1 3 Time based alerts Last backup This option is effective when the console is connected to a managed machine p 215 or to the management server p 216 The option defines whether to alert if no backup was performed on a given machine for a period of time You can configure the time period that is considered critical for your business The preset is alert if the last successful backup on a machine was completed more than 5 days ago The alert is displayed in the Alerts section of the Dashboard When the console is connected to the management server this setting will also control the color scheme of the Last backup column s value for each machine Last connection This option is effective when the console is connected to the management server or to a registered machine p 217 The option defines whether to alert if no connection was established between a registered machine and the management server for a period of time so indicating that the machine might not be centrally managed for instance in the case of network connection failure to that machine You can configure the length of time that is considered critical The preset is alert if the machin
175. es on a disk is unlimited A logical volume cannot be set as active If you recover a system volume to another hard disk with its own volumes and operating system you will most likely need only the data In this case you can recover the volume as logical to access the data only File system Change the volume file system if required By default the program selects the original volume s file system Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can make the following file system conversions FAT 16 gt FAT 32 and Ext2 gt Ext3 For volumes with other native file systems this option is not available Assume you are going to recover a volume from an old low capacity FAT16 disk to a newer disk FAT16 would not be effective and might even be impossible to set on the high capacity hard disk That s because FAT16 supports volumes up to 4GB so you will not be able to recover a 4GB FAT16 volume to a volume that exceeds that limit without changing the file system It would make sense here to change the file system from FAT16 to FAT32 Older operating systems MS DOS Windows 95 and Windows NT 3 x 4 x do not support FAT32 and will not be operable after you recover a volume and change its file system These can be normally recovered on a FAT16 volume only Logical drive letter for Windows only Assign a letter to the recovered volume Select the desired letter from a drop down list e With the default AUTO selection the first unused letter will be assign
176. f the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation o Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 see the Owners and credentials p 23 section To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 23 section 6 4 2 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 157 o Ifthe archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault o Ifthe archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the vault o Ifthe archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts o If the archive is stored
177. fer to Building Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution p 182 for details 6 10 1 1 Linux based bootable media When using the media builder you have to specify 1 176 optional The parameters of the Linux kernel Separate multiple parameters with spaces For example to be able to select a display mode for the bootable agent each time the media starts type vga ask For a list of parameters see Kernel parameters p 177 The Acronis bootable components to be placed on the media o Universal Restore can be enabled if Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore is installed on the machine where the media is created optional The timeout interval for the boot menu plus the component that will automatically start on timeout o If not configured the Acronis loader waits for someone to select whether to boot the operating system if present or the Acronis component o If you set say 10 sec for the bootable agent the agent will launch 10 seconds after the menu is displayed This enables unattended onsite operation when booting from a PXE server or WDS RIS optional Remote logon settings o user name and password to be entered on the console side at connection to the agent If you leave these fields empty the connection will be enabled on typing any symbols in the prompt window optional Network settings p 178 o TCP IP settings to be assigned to the machine network adapters optio
178. folder C Finance Mask Excludes all files with the log extension Mask my log Excludes all log files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my The above settings are not effective for the files or folders that were explicitly selected for recovery For example assume that you selected the folder MyFolder and the file MyFile tmp outside that folder and selected to skip all tmp files In this case all tmp files in the folder MyFolder will be skipped during the recovery process but the file MyFile tmp will not be skipped Overwriting Choose what to do if the program finds in the target folder a file with the same name as in the archive e Overwrite existing file this will give the file in the backup priority over the file on the hard disk e Overwrite existing file if it is older this will give priority to the most recent file modification whether it be in the backup or on the disk e Do not overwrite existing file this will give the file on the hard disk priority over the file in the backup If you allow overwriting files you still have an option to prevent overwriting p 148 e hidden files and folders e system files and folders e any files you specify by name or using wildcards e any folder you specify by path 6 3 7 Access credentials for destination To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Use the task credentials The program will access the destination
179. follows e Start backup at 6 00 PM e Back up on Workdays e Weekly monthly Friday e Keep backups o Daily 1 week o Weekly 10 days o Monthly 6 months With this scheme you will have a week to recover a previous version of a damaged file from a daily backup as well as 10 day access to weekly backups Each monthly full backup will be available for six months since the creation date Work schedule Suppose you are a part time financial consultant and work in a company on Tuesdays and Thursdays On these days you often make changes to your financial documents statements and update the spreadsheets etc on your laptop To back up this data you may want to e Track changes to the financial statements spreadsheets etc performed on Tuesdays and Thursdays daily incremental backup e Have a weekly summary of file changes since last month Friday weekly differential backup e Have a monthly full backup of your files 128 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Moreover assume that you want to retain access to all backups including the daily ones for at least six months The following GFS scheme suits such purposes e Start backup at 11 30 PM e Back up on Tuesday Thursday Friday e Weekly monthly Friday e Keep backups o Daily 6 months o Weekly 6 months o Monthly 5 years Here daily incremental backups will be created on Tuesdays and Thursdays with weekly and monthly backups performed on Fridays Note that in
180. g to the backup plan p 208 that produces the archive p 207 Agent side validation is performed in unmanaged vaults p 219 Archive See Backup archive p 207 B Backup The result of a single backup operation p 207 Physically it is a file or a tape record that contains a copy of the backed up data as of specific date and time Backup files created by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 have a TIB extension The TIB files resulting from backup consolidation p 211 are also called backups Backup archive Archive A set of backups p 207 created and managed by a backup plan p 208 An archive can contain multiple full backups p 214 as well as incremental p 215 and differential backups p 211 Backups belonging to the same archive are always stored in the same location Multiple backup plans can back up the same source to the same archive but the mainstream scenario is one plan one archive Backups in an archive are entirely managed by the backup plan Manual operations with archives validation p 219 viewing contents mounting and deleting backups should be performed using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Do not modify your archives using non Acronis tools such as Windows Explorer or third party file managers Backup operation An operation that creates a copy of the data that exists on a machine s p 215 hard disk for the purpose of recovering or reverting the data to a specified date and time Copy
181. ges the selected volume label e Format Volume p 204 Formats a volume giving it the necessary file system The full version of Acronis Disk Director will provide more tools and utilities for working with volumes Acronis Disk Director Lite must obtain exclusive access to the target volume This means no other disk management utilities like Windows Disk Management utility can access it at that time If you receive a message stating that the volume cannot be blocked close the disk management applications that use this volume and start again If you can not determine which applications use the volume close them all 198 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 6 11 6 1 Creating a volume You might need a new volume to Recover a previously saved backup copy in the exactly as was configuration Store collections of similar files separately for example an MP3 collection or video files on a separate volume Store backups images of other volumes disks on a special volume Install a new operating system or swap file on a new volume Add new hardware to a machine In Acronis Disk Director Lite the tool for creating volumes is the Create volume Wizard Types of dynamic volumes Simple Volume A volume created from free space on a single physical disk It can consist of one region on the disk or several regions virtually united by the Logical Disk Manager LDM It provides no additional reliability no speed improvemen
182. gram will automatically handle situations requiring user interaction except for handling bad sectors which is defined as a separate option If an operation cannot continue without user interaction it will fail Details of the operation including errors if any can be found in the operation log Re attempt if an error occurs The preset is Enabled Number of attempts 5 Interval between attempts 30 seconds When a recoverable error occurs the program re attempts to perform the unsuccessful operation You can set the time interval and the number of attempts The attempts will be stopped as soon as the operation succeeds OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first For example if the backup destination on the network becomes unavailable or not reachable the program will attempt to reach the destination every 30 seconds but no more than 5 times The attempts will be stopped as soon as the connection is resumed OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 65 Ignore bad sectors The preset is Disabled When the option is disabled the program will display a pop up window each time it comes across a bad sector and ask for a user decision as to whether to continue or stop the backup procedure In order to back up the valid information on a rapidly dying disk enable ignoring bad sectors The rest of the data will be backed up
183. grammable Interrupt Controller APIC You may want to use this parameter when experiencing problems with a particular hardware configuration vga ask Prompts for the video mode to be used by the bootable media s graphical user interface Without the vga parameter the video mode is detected automatically vga mode_number Specifies the video mode to be used by the bootable media s graphical user interface The mode number is given by mode_number in the hexadecimal format for example vga 0x318 Screen resolution and the number of colors corresponding to a mode number may be different on different machines We recommend using the vga ask parameter first to choose a value for mode_number quiet Disables displaying of startup messages when the Linux kernel is loading and starts the management console after the kernel is loaded This parameter is implicitly specified when creating the bootable media but you can remove this parameter while in the boot menu Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 177 Without this parameter all startup messages will be displayed followed by a command prompt To start the management console from the command prompt run the command bin product nousb Disables loading of the USB Universal Serial Bus subsystem nousb2 Disables USB 2 0 support USB 1 1 devices still work with this parameter This parameter allows you to use some USB drives in the USB 1 1 mode if they do not work in the USB 2 0 mode
184. h the most critical drivers included in the backup Solution for Windows Recover the volume once again When configuring recovery opt for using Acronis Universal Restore and specify the appropriate HAL and mass storage drivers e Windows was recovered to a dynamic volume that cannot be bootable Solution Recover Windows to a basic simple or mirrored volume e A system volume was recovered to a disk that does not have an MBR When you configure recovery of a system volume to a disk that does not have an MBR the program prompts whether you want to recover the MBR along with the system volume Opt for not recovering only if you do not want the system to be bootable Solution Recover the volume once again along with the MBR of the corresponding disk e The system uses Acronis OS Selector Because the Master Boot Record MBR can be changed during the system recovery Acronis OS Selector which uses the MBR might become inoperable If this happens reactivate Acronis OS Selector as follows Solution Boot the machine from the Acronis Disk Director s bootable media and select in the menu Tools gt Activate OS Selector e The system uses GRand Unified Bootloader GRUB and was recovered from a normal not from a raw that is sector by sector backup One part of the GRUB loader resides either in the first several sectors of the disk or in the first several sectors of the volume The rest is on the file system of one of the volumes System boota
185. has failed Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 75 The When user interaction is required check box to send notification during the operation when user interaction is required is always selected 4 Click Send Test WinPopup Message to check if the settings are correct 3 3 2 5 Event tracing It is possible to duplicate log events of the recovery operations performed on the managed machine in the Application Event Log of Windows or send the events to the specified SNMP managers Windows event log This option is effective only in Windows operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media This option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to log events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log of Windows to see this log run eventvwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to log the recovery operations events in the Application Event Log of Windows Select one of the following e Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options p 46 e Log the following event types to log events of the recovery operations in the Application Event Log Specify the types of events to be logged o All events log
186. he agent is not possible 1 5 Supported file systems Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can back up and recover the following file systems with the following limitations e FAT16 32 e NTFS e Ext2 Ext3 e ReiserFS3 particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node e ReiserFS4 volume recovery without the volume resize capability particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node e XFS volume recovery without the volume resize capability particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node e JFS particular files cannot be recovered from disk backups located on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node e Linux SWAP Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can back up and recover corrupted or non supported file systems using the sector by sector approach Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 15 1 6 Hardware requirements This section lists the minimum and recommended hardware requirements to install and run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console tem Minimum requirements Recommended Computer processor Modern processor 800 MHz or faster 1 GHz 32 bit x86 or 64 bit x64 processor Itanium platforms are not supported 800 600 pixels 1024 768 pixels or higher CD RW DVD RW d
187. he bootable agent starts on a machine the configuration is applied to the machine s network interface card NIC If the settings have not been pre configured the agent uses DHCP auto configuration You also have the ability to configure the network settings manually when the bootable agent is running on the machine Pre configuring multiple network connections You can pre configure TCP IP settings for up to ten network interface cards To ensure that each NIC will be assigned the appropriate settings create the media on the server for which the media is customized When you select an existing NIC in the wizard window its settings are selected for saving on the media The MAC address of each existing NIC is also saved on the media You can change the settings except for the MAC address or configure the settings for a non existent NIC if need be Once the bootable agent starts on the server it retrieves the list of available NICs This list is sorted by the slots the NICs occupy the closest to the processor on top The bootable agent assigns each known NIC the appropriate settings identifying the NICs by their MAC addresses After the NICs with known MAC addresses are configured the remaining NICs are assigned the settings that you have made for non existent NICs starting from the upper non assigned NIC You can customize bootable media for any machine and not only for the machine where the media is created To do so configure the
188. he drivers can help you access the device where the backup archive is located Click Add and specify the path to the necessary inf file for a corresponding SCSI RAID SATA Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 181 7 8 controller network adapter tape drive or other device You will have to repeat this procedure for each driver you want to be included in the resulting WinPE boot media Choose whether you want to create ISO or WIM image or upload the media on Acronis PXE Server Specify the full path to the resulting image file including the file name or specify the PXE server and provide the user name and password to access it Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed Burn the ISO to CD or DVD using a third party tool or copy to a flash drive Once a machine boots into WinPE Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 starts automatically To create a PE image ISO file from the resulting WIM file replace the default boot wim file in your Windows PE folder with the newly created WIM file For the above example type copy c AcronisMedia wim c winpe_x86 ISO sources boot wim use the Oscdimg tool For the above example type oscdimg n bc winpe_x86 etfsboot com c winpe_x86 ISO c winpe_x86 winpe_x86 iso For more information on customizing Windows PE see the Windows Preinstallation Environment User s Guide Winpe chm 6 10 1 4 Building Bart PE with Acronis Plug in from Windows distribution 1 2
189. he maximal roll back period for your data Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 29 Tower of Hanoi by Acronis The Tower of Hanoi backup scheme is generally too complex to mentally calculate the next media to be used But Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides you with automation of the scheme usage You can set up the backup scheme while creating a backup plan Acronis implementation for the scheme has the following features e up to 16 backup levels e incremental backups on first level A to gain time and storage savings for the most frequent backup operations but data recovery from such backups takes longer because it generally requires access to three backups e full backups on the last level E for five level pattern the rarest backups in the scheme take more time and occupy more space in storage e differential backups on all intermediate levels B C and D for five level pattern e the pattern starts with a full backup since the very first backup cannot be incremental e the scheme forces every backup level to keep only the most recent backup other backups from the level have to be deleted however backup deletion is postponed in cases where the backup is a base for another incremental or differential one e anold backup on a level is kept until a new backup has been successfully created on the level The table shows the pattern for the five level backup scheme The pattern consists of 16 sessions level 1 Incr
190. he user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 124 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 6 2 9 Backup schemes Choose one of the available backup schemes Back up now to create a backup task for manual start and run the task immediately after its creation Back up later to create a backup task for manual start OR schedule one time task execution in the future Simple to schedule when and how often to backup data and specify retention rules Grandfather Father Son to use the Grandfather Father Son backup scheme The scheme does not allow data to be backed up more than once a day You set the days of week when the daily backup will be performed and select from these days the day of weekly monthly backup Then you set the retention periods for the daily referred to as sons weekly referred to as fathers and monthly referred to as grandfathers backups The expired backups will be deleted automatically Tower of Hanoi to use the Tower of Hanoi backup scheme where you schedule when and how often to back up sessions and select the number of backup levels up to 16 In this scheme the data can be backed up more than once a day By setting up the backup schedule and selecting backup levels you automatically obtain the rollback period the guaranteed number of sessions that you can go back at any time The automatic cleanup mechanism maintains the required rollback perio
191. hedule and set the retention periods for the daily monthly and weekly backups The daily backups are referred to as sons weekly backups are referred to as fathers the longest lived monthly backups are called grandfathers GFS as a tape rotation scheme GFS was initially created and is often referred to as a tape rotation scheme Tape rotation schemes as such do not provide automation They just determine e how many tapes you need to enable recovery with the desired resolution time interval between recovery points and roll back period e which tapes you should overwrite with the forthcoming backup Tape rotation schemes enable you to get by with the minimal number of cartridges and not to be buried in used tapes A lot of Internet sources describe varieties of the GFS tape rotation scheme You are free to use any of the varieties when backing up to a locally attached tape device GFS by Acronis With Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 you can easily set up a backup plan that will regularly back up data and clean up the resulting archive according to the GFS scheme Create the backup plan as usual For the backup destination choose any storage device where automatic cleanup can be performed such as an HDD based storage device or robotic tape library Since the space freed on the tape after cleanup cannot be reused until all the tape becomes free take into account additional considerations when using GFS on a tape libra
192. her the data is successfully protected A task is a set of sequential actions to be performed on a machine when a certain time comes or certain event occurs To keep track of a task s current progress examine its state p 105 Check a task status p 106 to ascertain the result of a task Way of working e Use filters to display the desired backup plans tasks in the backup plans table By default the table displays all the plans of the managed machine sorted by name You can also hide the unneeded columns and show the hidden ones See the Filtering and sorting backup plans and tasks p 110 section for details e Inthe backup table select the backup plan task e Use the toolbar s buttons to take an action on the selected plan task See the Actions on backup plans and tasks p 107 section for details You can run edit stop and delete the created plans and tasks e Use the Information panel to review detailed information on the selected plan task The panel is collapsed by default To expand the panel click the Al chevron The content of the panel is also duplicated in the Plan details p 113 and Task details p 111 windows respectively Sliced Understanding states and statuses Backup plan execution states A backup plan can be in one of the following execution states Idle Waiting Running Stopping Need Interaction Plan states names are the same as task state names because a plan state is a cumulative state of
193. iate availability of an Exchange information store after starting the recovery While based on the same technology recovery of the Information Store proceeds in quite a different way than the operating system recovery described in this section Supported operating systems Acronis Active Restore is available when recovering Windows starting from Windows 2000 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 41 Limitation The only supported archive location is a local drive or more precisely any device available through the machine s BIOS This may be Acronis Secure Zone a USB hard drive a flash drive or any internal hard drive How it works When configuring a recovery operation you select disks or volumes to recover from a backup Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 scans the selected disks or volumes in the backup If this scan finds a supported operating system the Acronis Active Restore option becomes available If you do not enable the option the system recovery will proceed in the usual way and the machine will become operational after the recovery is completed If you enable the option the sequence of actions will be set as follows Once the system recovery is started the operating system boots from the backup The machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The data required to serve incoming requests is recovered with the highest priority everything else is recovered in the background Because serving re
194. ication at target are described in Deduplication overview Save software RAID and LVM metadata along with backups This option is effective only for disk level backups of machines running Linux The preset is Enabled When this option is enabled Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will save information about the structure of logical volumes known as LVM volumes and of Linux Software RAID devices known as MD devices to the etc Acronis directory before creating the backup When recovering MD devices and LVM volumes under bootable media you can use this information to automatically recreate the volume structure For instructions see Recovering MD devices and logical volumes p 186 When using this option make sure that the volume containing the etc Acronis directory is among the volumes to back up Use FTP in Active mode The preset is Disabled Enable this option if the FTP server supports active mode and you want this mode to be used for file transfers 3 3 2 Default recovery options Each Acronis agent has its own default recovery options Once an agent is installed the default options have pre defined values which are referred to as presets in the documentation When creating a recovery task you can either use a default option or override the default option with the custom value that will be specific for this task only You can also customize a default option itself by changing its value against the pre defined one The
195. ick it and then click Information 3 Click OK 6 5 3 Access credentials To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Use the current user credentials The program will access the location using the credentials of the current user o Use the following credentials The program will access the location using the credentials you specify Use this option if the current user account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 5 4 Volume selection Select the volumes to mount and configure the mounting parameters for each of the selected volumes as follows 1 Select the check box for each volume you need to mount 2 Click on the selected volume to set its mounting parameters o Access mode choose the mode you want the volume to be mounted in e Read only enables exploring and opening files within the backup without committing any changes e Read write with
196. ie chart lets you estimate the vault s load it shows the proportion of the vault s free space and occupied space free space space on the storage device where the vault is located For example if the vault is located ona hard disk the vault free space is free space of the appropriate volume i occupied space total size of backup archives and their metadata if it is located in the vault Other files that may be put to this folder by a user are not counted Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 81 The legend displays the following information about the vault e full path to the vault e total number of archives and backups stored in the vault e the ratio of the occupied space to the original data size Vault content The Vault content section contains the archives table and toolbar The archives table displays archives and backups that are stored in the vault Use the archives toolbar to perform actions on the selected archives and backups The list of backups is expanded by clicking the plus sign to the left of the archive s name All the archives are grouped by type on the following tabs e The Disk archives tab lists all the archives that contain disk or volume backups images e The File archives tab lists all the archives that contain file backups Related sections Operations with archives stored in a vault p 84 Operations with backups p 85 Filtering and sorting archives p 86 Bars of the Actions and
197. ilable in the Custom scheme Suppose that we need a scheme that will produce monthly full backups weekly differential backups and daily incremental backups Then the backup schedule can look as follows Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 133 Full backup Schedule Monthly every Last Sunday of the month at 9 00 PM Incremental Schedule Weekly every workday at 7 00 PM Differential Schedule Weekly every Saturday at 8 00 PM Further we want to add conditions that have to be satisfied for a backup task to start This is set up in the Conditions fields for each backup type Full backup Conditions Location available Incremental Conditions User is logged off Differential Conditions User is idle As a result a full backup originally scheduled at 9 00 PM may actually start later as soon as the backup location becomes available Likewise backup tasks for incremental and differential backups will wait until all users are logged off and users are idle respectively Finally we create retention rules for the archive let us retain only backups that are no older than six months and let the cleanup be performed after each backup task and also on the last day of every month Retention rules Delete backups older than 6 months Apply the rules After backing up On schedule Cleanup schedule Monthly on the Last day of All months at 10 00 PM By default a backup is not deleted as long as it has dependent backups that must be ke
198. ill be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of weeks 90 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Advanced scheduling settings are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples One day in the week schedule Run the task every Friday at 10PM starting from a certain date say 05 14 2009 and ending after six months The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 Every 1 week s on Fri 2 Once at 10 00 00 PM 3 Effective From 05 13 2009 The task will be started on the nearest Friday at 10 PM To 11 13 2009 The task will be performed for the last time on this date but the task itself will still be available in the Tasks view after this date If this date were not a Friday the task would be last performed on the last Friday preceding this date This schedule is widely used when creating a custom backup scheme The One day in the week like schedule is added to the full backups while the incremental backups are scheduled to be performed on workdays For more
199. inates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data This is especially useful for mobile users e Can serve as a primary destination when using dual destination p 66 backup Limitation The zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk or a disk using the GPT partitioning style Managing the Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal vault p 219 Once created on a managed machine the zone is always present in the list of Personal vaults Centralized backup plans p 210 can use Acronis Secure Zone as well as local plans p 215 If you have used Acronis Secure Zone before please note a radical change in the zone functionality The zone does not perform automatic cleanup that is deleting old archives anymore Use backup schemes with automatic cleanup to back up to the zone or delete outdated backups manually using the archive management functionality 38 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 With the new Acronis Secure Zone behavior you obtain the ability to e list archives located in the zone and backups contained in each archive e examine a backup s content e mount a disk backup to copy files from the backup to a physical disk e safely delete archives and backups from the archives For more information about operations available in Acronis Secure Zone see the Personal vaults p 81 section Upgrade from Acronis True Image Echo When upgrading from Acro
200. incremental backup appended to a full backup and a differential backup appended to the same full backup at the same point of time The above mentioned difference implies creating a differential backup after or instead of creating multiple incremental backups An incremental or differential backup created after disk defragmentation might be considerably larger than usual because defragmentation changes file locations on the disk and the backup reflects these changes It is recommended that you re create a full backup after disk defragmentation The following table summarizes the advantages and shortcomings of each backup type as they appear based on common knowledge In real life these parameters depend on numerous factors such as the amount speed and pattern of data changes the nature of the data the physical 22 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 specifications of the devices the backup recovery options you set to name a few Practice is the best guide to selecting the optimal backup scheme Parameter Full backup Differential backup Incremental backup Storage space Maximal Medium Minimal Creation time Maximal Medium Minimal Recovery time Minimal Medium Maximal 2 3 User privileges on a managed machine When managing a machine running Windows the scope of a user s management rights depends on the user s privileges on the machine Regular users A regular user such as a member of the Users group has the following management rights
201. ine that will perform the conversion The machine has to have Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows Agent for ESX ESXi or Agent for Hyper V installed Virtualization server p 136 Here you select the resulting virtual machine type and location Available options depend on the host you selected in the previous step Storage p 136 Choose the storage on the virtualization server or the folder to place the virtual machine files in Resultant VMs Specify the name of the virtual machine After you have performed all the required steps click OK to create the backup plan After that you might be prompted for the password p 119 The plan you have created will be accessible for examination and managing in the Backup plans and tasks p 103 view 6 2 1 Why is the program asking for the password A scheduled or postponed task has to run regardless of users being logged on In case you have not explicitly specified the credentials under which the task s will run the program proposes using your account Enter your password specify another account or change the scheduled start to manual 6 2 2 Backup plan s credentials Provide the credentials for the account under which the plan s tasks will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Run under the current user The tasks will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If any of the tasks has to run on s
202. ing up a conversion schedule A disk backup p 212 created while executing a backup plan can be converted to a virtual machine immediately or on schedule or you can combine both methods The conversion task will be created on the machine being backed up and will use this machine s date and time As a result of the first conversion a new virtual machine will be created Every subsequent conversion will re create this machine from scratch First a new temporary virtual machine is created If this operation succeeds the old machine is replaced If an error occurs during creation of the temporary machine the temporary machine is deleted This way the task always ends up with the single machine but extra storage space is required during conversion to keep the temporary machine The old virtual machine must be powered off by the time of conversion otherwise it will not be possible to delete it and the conversion task will fail If this happens you can restart the conversion task manually after powering off the machine Any changes made to the machine while it was powered on will be overwritten Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 135 6 2 11 2 Selecting a host that will perform conversion Specify the machine that will perform the conversion The machine has to have Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows Agent for ESX ESXi or Agent for Hyper V installed Take into account the following considerations Which agent is in
203. inux Mounting volumes in the read write mode enables you to modify the backup content that is save move create delete files or folders and run executables consisting of one file Limitation Mounting of volume backups stored on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node is not possible Usage scenarios e Sharing mounted images can be easily shared to networked users e Band aid database recovery solution mount up an image that contains an SQL database from a recently failed machine This will give access to the database until the failed machine is recovered e Offline virus clean if a machine is attacked the administrator shuts it down boots with bootable media and creates an image Then the administrator mounts this image in read write mode scans and cleans it with an antivirus program and finally recovers the machine e Error check if recovery failed due to a disk error mount the image in the read write mode Then check the mounted disk for errors with the chkdsk r command To mount an image perform the following steps Source Archive p 161 Specify the path to the archive location and select the archive containing disk backups Backup p 162 Select the backup Access credentials p 162 Optional Provide credentials for the archive location To access this option select the Advanced view check box 160 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Mount settings Volumes p 162 Select volumes to
204. ions both under the operating system and on bare metal To find out more about Acronis Disk Director Lite see the Disk management p 190 section Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 35 2 9 Tape support Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 supports tape libraries autoloaders SCSI and USB tape drives as storage devices A tape device can be locally attached to a managed machine in this case the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent writes and reads the tapes or accessed through the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node Storage nodes ensure fully automatic operation of tape libraries and autoloaders Backup archives created using different ways of access to tape have different formats A tape written by a storage node cannot be read by an agent Linux based and PE based bootable media allow for backup and recovery using both local access and access through the storage node Backups created using the bootable media can be recovered with the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent running in the operating system 2 9 1 Tape compatibility table The following table summarizes the readability of tapes written by Acronis True Image Echo and Acronis True Image 9 1 product families in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 The table also illustrates the compatibility of tapes written by various components of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 is readable on a tape device attached to a machine with ABR10 ABR10 ABR10 ABR10 Bootable Age
205. irtual computer uniquely identified by an operating system installation Machines with multiple operating systems multi boot systems are considered as multiple machines Managed machine A machine p 215 either physical or virtual where at least one Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent p 207 is installed Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 215 Managed vault A centralized vault p 210 managed by a storage node p 217 Archives p 207 in a managed vault can be accessed as follows bsp node_address vault_name archive_name Physically managed vaults can reside on a network share SAN NAS on a hard drive local to the storage node or on a tape library locally attached to the storage node The storage node performs storage node side cleanup p 218 and storage node side validation p 218 for each archive stored in the managed vault An administrator can specify additional operations that the storage node will perform deduplication p 211 encryption Any managed vault is self contained that is contains all metadata the storage node needs to manage the vault In case the storage node is lost or its database is corrupted the new storage node retrieves the metadata and re creates the database When the vault is attached to another storage node the same procedure takes place Management server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server A central server that drives data protection within the enterprise ne
206. is recommended for backup destinations such as shared folders or centralized vaults When there is insufficient space while backing up The archive will be cleaned up only during backup and only if there is not enough space to create a new backup In this case the program will act as follows Delete the oldest full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups e If there is only one full backup left and a full backup is in progress then delete the last full backup with all dependent incremental differential backups e f there is only one full backup left and an incremental or differential backup is in progress an error occurs saying there is a lack of available space This setting is recommended when backing up to a USB drive or Acronis Secure Zone This setting is not applicable to managed vaults This setting enables deletion of the last backup in the archive in case your storage device cannot accommodate more than one backup However you might end up with no backups if the program is not able to create the new Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 backup for some reason Apply the rules Specifies when to apply the retention rules p 31 only if the retention rules For example the cleanup procedure can be set up to run after each backup and are set also on schedule This option is available only if you have set at least one retention rule in Retention rules Cleanup schedule Specifies a schedule
207. isabling a backup plan Temporarily disabling a backup plan is needed when moving archives from one vault to another by means of the third party file manager Applies to backup plans that use custom backup schemes only To disable a backup plan 1 Click Edit 2 Enter the backup scheme scheduling option and disable the schedule for the desired period by changing the Start date and or End date parameters Task details The Task details window also duplicated on the Information panel aggregates all information on the selected task When a task requires user interaction a message and action buttons appear above the tabs The message contains a brief description of the problem The buttons allow you to retry or stop the task or the backup plan Types of tasks Task name Description Backup disk Backing up disks and volumes Backup file Backing up files and folders Backup virtual machine Backing up an entire virtual machine or its volumes Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 111 Recovery disk Recovery file Recovery volume Recovery MBR Recovery disk to existing VM Recovery disk to new VM Recovery existing VM Recovery new VM Validation archive Validation backup Validation vault Cleanup ASZ creation ASZ management Disk management Disk backup recovery File and folder recovery Recovery of volumes from a disk backup Master boot record recovery Recovery of a disk volume backup to an e
208. ith Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi you can create a new virtual machine on the respective virtualization server You might need to prepare target disks before recovery Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 includes a handy disk management utility which enables you to create or delete volumes change a disk partitioning style create a disk group and perform other disk management operations on the target hardware both under the operating system and on bare metal To find out more about Acronis Disk Director LV see the Disk management p 190 section To create a recovery task perform the following steps General Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the recovery task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Task credentials p 140 Optional The task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task account credentials if necessary To access this option select the Advanced view check box Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 137 What to recover Archive p 140 Select the archive to recover data from Data type p 140 Applies to disk recovery Choose the type of data you need to recover from the selected disk backup Content p 141 Select the backup and content to be recovered Access credentials p 141 Optional Provide credentials for the archive location if the task account does not have the right to a
209. ity everything else is recovered in the background Limitations e the backup must be located on the local drive any device available through the BIOS except for network boot e does not work with Linux images Acronis Plug in for WinPE A modification of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows that can run in the preinstallation environment The plug in can be added to a WinPE p 220 image using Bootable Media Builder The resulting bootable media p 209 can be used to boot any PC compatible machine and perform with certain limitations most of the direct management p 212 operations without help of an operating system Operations can be configured and controlled either locally through the GUI or remotely using the console p 211 Acronis Secure Zone A secure volume for storing backup archives p 207 within a managed machine p 215 Advantages e enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides e offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error e eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data This is especially useful for mobile users e can serve as the primary location for dual destination backup Limitation Acronis Secure Zone cannot be organized on a dynamic disk p 213 or a disk using the GPT partitioning style Acronis Secure Zone is considered as a personal
210. ive created according to the GFS scheme Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Weekly Monthly Friday Keep daily backups 7 days Keep weekly backups 2 weeks Keep monthly backups 6 months ooococeo ooo o 00 0 cu U COU CC fo ocooucouce W wW W W W e Keep daly 7 days Oo 0 U0 00 0 cu Cc VCO Co ou UC C0 OC vouu0000 j keep weekly 2 week oovoucoce gu 0 00 00 90 ov vuvVCvC CSO oo 0 Oo 00 0 Oo M oo0oo0oo0ooo oOo 00 0 ooog Co Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 27 Starting from the third week weekly backups will be regularly deleted After 6 months monthly backups will start to be deleted The diagram for weekly and monthly backups will look similar to the week based timescale The resulting archive real In reality the archive content will somewhat differ from the ideal scheme When using the incremental and differential backup methods you cannot delete a backup as soon as the scheme requires if later backups are based on this backup Regular consolidation is unacceptable because it takes too much system resources The program has to wait until the scheme requires the deletion of all the dependent backups and then deletes the entire chain Here is how the first month of your backup plan will appear in real life F stands for full backup Dif stands for differential backup I stands for incremental backup The backups that outlive their nominal lifetime because of depen
211. ized vault e 210 216 Change volume label 198 204 Change volume letter 198 203 Changing disk status 198 Choosing the operating system for disk management 191 198 Cleanup 17 207 209 211 218 219 Cloning method and advanced options 194 Collecting system information 205 Common operations 84 Compression level 49 58 Conditions 67 97 Configuring iSCSI and NDAS devices 184 Connecting to a machine booted from media 183 Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console 17 206 209 211 212 Console options 44 Consolidation 207 211 Content selection 138 141 Create volume wizard 200 Creating a backup plan 107 109 116 135 156 Creating a personal vault 82 83 222 Creating a volume 198 199 Creating Acronis Secure Zone 83 170 Creating the volume structure automatically e 186 Creating the volume structure manually 186 187 Custom backup scheme 91 93 132 D Daily schedule 88 130 Dashboard 101 102 Data type 138 140 Decreasing Acronis Secure Zone 172 Deduplicating vault 211 Deduplication 211 216 217 Default backup and recovery options 46 47 49 Default backup options 49 118 Default recovery options 70 139 Delete volume 198 202 Deleting Acronis Secure Zone 173 Deleting archives and backups 84 85 86 Destination selection 142 Differential backup 207 212 Direct managem
212. k followed by the export task Different ways to create an export task Using the Export page is the most general way to create an export task Here you can export any backup or archive you have permission to access You can access the Export page from the Vaults view Right click the object to export archive or backup and select Export from the context menu The Export page will be opened with the pre selected object as a source All you need to do is to select a destination and optionally provide a name for the task To export an archive or a backup perform the following steps General Task name Optional Enter a unique name for the task A conscious name lets you quickly identify the task among the others Task credentials p 166 Optional The export task will run on behalf of the user who is creating the task You can change the task credentials if necessary To access this option select the Advanced view check box What to export Export Select an object to export Archive p 140 in that case you need to specify the archive only Backups p 167 specify the archive first and then select the desired backup s in this archive Access credentials p 167 Optional Provide credentials for accessing the source if the task account does not have enough privileges to access it To access this option select the Advanced view check box Where to export Archive p 168 Enter the path to the location wh
213. l be executed Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 55 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cleared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not back up until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Continue the N A Continue the Continue th backup after the backup l command is concurrently with backup only after S executed despite the command the command is i command execution and successfully h z execution failure irrespective of the executed Delete or success command the TIB file and i 5 2 execution result temporary files and fail the task if the command execution fails 3 3 1 5 File level backup snapshot This option is effective only for file level backup in Windows and Linux operating systems This option defines whether to back up files one by one or by taking an instant data snapshot Note Files that are stored on network shares are always backed up one by one The preset is Create snapshot if it is possible Select one of the following 56 Always create a snapshot The snapshot enables backing up of all files including files opened for exclusive access The files will be backed up at th
214. l times longer Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Keep backups Monthly This step defines the retention rule for monthly backups The cleanup task will run after each monthly backup and delete all monthly backups that are older than you specify The monthly backups retention period cannot be less than the weekly backups retention period It is usually set several times longer You have the option to keep the monthly backups infinitely The resulting archive ideal Assume you select to keep daily backups for 7 days weekly backups for 2 weeks and monthly backups for 6 months Here is how your archive would appear after the backup plan is launched if all the backups were full and so could be deleted as soon as the scheme requires The left column shows days of the week For each day of the week the content of the archive after the regular backup and the subsequent cleanup is shown D stands for the backup that is considered Daily W stands for the backup that is considered Weekly M stands for the backup that is considered Monthly Mo Foo fwo Tou Ft Sat S Wo fuo W rn Ft Yt Biu mo Tu Wo Ti Fa Set Bt Mo f Tue f we Ts Pai faat Total D D D W D D D D W D D D D W D D D D M schedule SS _ Mon Tue We Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue We Thu wW Fri wW Sat wW Sun wW Mon wW Tue wW We wW W Thu W Ww Fri W Sat W Sun wW Mon W Tue wW We W Thu wW W Fri wW Sat W An ideal arch
215. label will be graphically represented in the Disk Management view of the console immediately 6 11 6 6 Format volume You might want to format a volume if you want to change its file system e to save additional space which is being lost due to the cluster size on the FAT16 or FAT32 file systems e asa quick and more or less reliable way of destroying data residing in this volume If you want to format a volume 1 Select a volume to format 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Format in the context menu You will be forwarded to the Format Volume window where you will be able to set the new file system options You can choose one of the Windows file systems FAT16 disabled if the Volume Size is more than 2 GB FAT32 disabled if the Volume Size is more than 2 TB or NTFS In the text window you will be able to enter the volume label if necessary by default this window is empty In setting the cluster size you can choose between any number in the preset amount for each file system Note the program suggests the cluster size best suited to the volume with the chosen file system 3 If you click OK to proceed with the Format Volume operation you ll add a pending operation of formatting a volume 204 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 205 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume
216. le trueimagemnt unmount mnt 6 11 Disk management Acronis Disk Director Lite is a tool for preparing a machine disk volume configuration for recovering the volume images saved by the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 software Sometimes after the volume has been backed up and its image placed into a safe storage the machine disk configuration might change due to a HDD replacement or hardware loss In such case with the help of Acronis Disk Director Lite the user has the possibility to recreate the necessary disk configuration so that the volume image can be recovered exactly as it was or with any alteration of the disk or volume structure the user might consider necessary All operations on disks and volumes involve a certain risk of data damage Operations on system bootable or data volumes must be carried out very carefully to avoid potential problems with the booting process or hard disk data storage Operations with hard disks and volumes take a certain amount of time and any power loss unintentional turning off of the machine or accidental pressing of the Reset button during the procedure could result in volume damage and data loss All operations on volumes of dynmic disks in Windows XP and Windows 2000 require Acronis Managed Machine Service to be run under an account with administrator s rights Please take all necessary precautions p 190 to avoid possible data loss 6 11 1 Basic precautions To avoid any possib
217. le Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer o Ifthe archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives Click OK 6 7 3 Backup selection To specify a backup s to export 1 At the top of the window select the respective check box es To ensure that you choose the right backup click on the backup and look at the bottom table that displays the volumes contained in the selected backup To obtain information on a volume right click it and then select Information Click OK 6 7 4 Access credentials for source Specify credentials required for access to the location where the source archive or the backup
218. le disk and volume structure damage or data loss please take all necessary precautions and follow these simple rules 1 Create a disk image of the disk on which volumes will be created or managed Having your most important data backed up to another hard disk or CD will allow you to work on disk volumes being reassured that your data is safe Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 is an extremely effective comprehensive data backup and recovery solution It creates a data or disk backup copy stored in a compressed archive file that can be restored in case of any accident 2 Test your disk to make sure it is fully functional and does not contain bad sectors or file system errors 190 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 3 Do not perform any disk volume operations while running other software that has low level disk access Close these programs before running Acronis Disk Director Lite With these simple precautions you will protect yourself against accidental data loss 6 11 2 Running Acronis Disk Director Lite You can run Acronis Disk Director Lite under Windows or start it from a bootable media Running Acronis Disk Director Lite under Windows If you run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console and connect it to a managed machine the Disk management view will be available in the Navigation tree of the console with which you can start Acronis Disk Director Lite Running Acronis Disk Director Lite from a bootable media
219. lete all 84 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 The program duplicates your selection in the new window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be then confirm the deletion 4 2 2 Operations with backups To perform any operation with a backup you have to select it first To select a backup expand the archive then click the backup If the archive is protected with a password you will be asked to provide it All the operations described below are performed by clicking the corresponding buttons on the toolbar These operations can be also accessed from the Backup name actions bar on the Actions and tools pane and from the Backup name actions item of the main menu The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backups To View backup content in a separate window Recover Recover a disk volume as a virtual machine Validate a backup Export a backup Delete a single or multiple backups Delete all archives and backups in the vault Do Click View content In the Backup Content window examine the backup content Click Recover The Recover data p 137 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Right click the disk backup then select Recover as virtual machine The Recover data p 137 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Select the location and the type of new vir
220. leted Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 87 The scheduler behavior in case the event occurs but the condition or any of multiple conditions is not met is defined by the Task start conditions p 66 backup option What ifs e What if an event occurs and a condition if any is met while the previous task run has not completed The event will be ignored e What if an event occurs while the scheduler is waiting for the condition required by the previous event The event will be ignored e What if the condition is not met for a very long time If delaying a backup is getting risky you can force the condition tell the users to log off or run the task manually To automatically handle this situation you can set the time interval after which the task will run regardless of the condition 5 1 Daily schedule Daily schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems To specify a daily schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Every lt gt day s Set up the certain number of days you want the task to be run For example if you set Every 2 day s the task will be started on every other day In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be restarted during the specified time interval For example setting the task f
221. lidate soriana a e a a a a A ERR 159 Mo nti g aniiMage s pecher a eae vinta ison ee nd oes 160 AL GHIVE SEIECTION EER stu cose cee saescdea caus shee cdaladeans A cadet ned oktuatom EE 161 BaCkUp SClE Ct ON sdevsvaccccsccaesiecssdsedsecaessteessdsscdvasucencskdddcsecstsstucdouserdeeusiesi a a a di sreusesidectuts 162 ACCESS credential israe tuen e Er E E dato vaetbak dca a gubout een 162 oaea E E A AE E T E 162 Managing mo nted images arne i e a a a T E beso a ie eee 163 Exporting archives and DackuUpS cccccscssssccecececessesseaecececesesseaaeeeeeessesseaeaeeeeseeseeseaaeas 163 MASK RE gn E AE E A T E E E A 166 Archive selecti Manninen nn an oo Rie n arse a a Aa 166 Ba ck p selectio Mai narnia a a a e a a 167 Access credentials for SOUC Eiern a e e a iaeaea araar iaee 167 LOCATION SEIS ee aE A E EA E AA A AAT 168 Access credentials for destination ccccscssssssscsscsscsscsssssesssscsscssesscsessessessessesecsessecessesoessesaueaseseeesaess 169 Ne dalgia silga C is AA E E E E E theses eelacds sues 169 Creating Acronis Sec r Zone a rekina E e Ea eaa AANEEN Ea A ALe TAER ETAREN e 170 Managing Acronis Secure Zone cscsscsssesscesecsscsssesscesecessasssesesecseceaeseesesecusssesasseaesenesarsesesesenseaeenesens 172 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager cccsssseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeess 173 Bootable a110 F PERE EEEE E E EE A E ET 174 How to create bootable Media cecesesssssssses
222. ll be compressed well To specify the compression level Select one of the following e None the data will be copied as is without any compression The resulting backup size will be maximal e Normal recommended in most cases e High the resulting backup size will typically be less than for the Normal level e Maximum the data will be compressed as much as possible The backup duration will be maximal You may want to select maximum compression when backing up to removable media to reduce the number of blank disks required 3 3 1 9 Backup performance Use this group of options to specify the amount of network and system resources to allocate to the backup process Backup performance options might have a more or less noticeable effect on the speed of the backup process This depends on the overall system configuration and the physical characteristics of devices the backup is being performed from or to Backup priority This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems The priority of a process running in a system determines the amount of CPU and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the backup priority will free more resources for other applications Increasing the backup priority might speed up the backup process by requesting the operating system to allocate more resources like the CPU to the backup application However the resulting effect will depend on the overall CPU usage and othe
223. ll be kept until all backups that depend on it also become outdated Then all the chain will be deleted at once during the regular cleanup This mode helps to avoid the potentially time consuming consolidation but requires extra space for storing backups whose deletion is postponed The archive size and or the backup age can exceed the values you specify e Consolidate the backup The program will consolidate the backup that is subject to deletion with the next dependent backup For example the retention rules require to delete a full backup but retain the next incremental one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated the incremental backup date When an incremental or differential backup from the middle of the chain is deleted the resulting backup type will be incremental This mode ensures that after each cleanup the archive size and the backups age are within the bounds you specify The consolidation however may take a lot of time and system resources And you still need some extra space in the vault for temporary files created during consolidation What you need to know about consolidation Please be aware that consolidation is just a method of deletion but not an alternative to deletion The resulting backup will not contain data that was present in the deleted backup and was absent from the retained incremental or differential backup Backups resulting from consolidation always have maximum compression Thi
224. lose them alll 6 11 5 1 Disk initialization If you add any new disk to your machine Acronis Disk Director Lite will notice the configuration change and scan the added disk to include it to the disk and volume list If the disk is still not initialized or possibly has a file structure unknown to the machine system that means that no programs can be installed on it and you will not be able to store any files there Acronis Disk Director Lite will detect that the disk is unusable by the system and needs to be initialized The Disk management view will show the newly detected hardware as a gray block with a grayed icon thus indicating that the disk is unusable by the system 192 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 If you need to initialize a disk 1 Select a disk to initialize 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Initialize in the context menu You will be forwarded to the Disk Initialization window that will provide the basic hardware details such as the disk s number capacity and state to aid you in the choice of your possible action 3 In the window you will be able to set the disk partitioning scheme MBR or GPT and the disk type basic or dynamic The new disk state will be graphically represented in the Disk Management view of the console immediately 4 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of the disk initialization To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 205 it Exiting
225. lume size p 201 If you click the Finish button you will complete the operation planning To perform the planned operation click Commit in the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window If you set a 64K cluster size for FAT16 FAT32 or on 8KB 64KB cluster size for NTFS Windows can mount the volume but some programs e g Setup programs might calculate its disk space incorrectly 6 11 6 2 Delete volume This version of Acronis Disk Director Lite has reduced functionality because it is mainly a tool for preparing bare metal systems for recovering previously saved volume images The features of resizing the existing volumes and creating the new volumes using free space from the existing ones exist on the full version of the software so with this version deleting an existing volume sometimes might be the only way to free the necessary disk space without changing the existing disk configuration After a volume is deleted its space is added to unallocated disk space It can be used for creation of a new volume or to change another volume s type If you need to delete a volume 1 Select a hard disk and a volume to be deleted 2 Select Delete volume or a similar item in the Operations sidebar list or click the Delete the selected volume icon on the toolbar If the volume contains any data you will receive the warning that all the information on this volume will be lost irrevocably 202 Copyright Acronis
226. m such as the volume where the operating system resides requires a reboot to the bootable environment which is a part of the agent After the recovery is completed the recovered operating system goes online automatically 20 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 If the machine fails to boot or you need to recover data to bare metal you boot the machine using the bootable media and configure the recovery operation in the same way as the recovery task The following diagram illustrates the recovery using the bootable media Managed Machine Vault SL i Bootable Agent 5 A RAM Archive 1 Console F Backup 0 F Backup 2 F Backup 0 Restore p operation D Backup 3 l Backup 4 Restore Data2 from Backup 4 2 2 Full incremental and differential backups Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the capability to use popular backup schemes such as Grandfather Father Son and Tower of Hanoi as well as to create custom backup schemes All backup schemes are based on full incremental and differential backup methods The term scheme in fact denotes the algorithm of applying these methods plus the algorithm of the archive cleanup Comparing backup methods with each other does not make much sense because the methods work as a team in a backup scheme Each method should play its specific role according to its advantages A competent backup scheme will benefit from the advantages of all backup methods and lessen the i
227. mand execution fails check box In case the command execution fails the task run result will be set to Failed When the check box is not selected the command execution result does not affect the task execution failure or success You can track the command execution result by exploring the log or the errors and warnings displayed on the Dashboard 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct A post recovery command will not be executed if the recovery proceeds with reboot 3 3 2 2 Recovery priority This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The priority of a process running in a system determines the amount of CPU and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the recovery priority will free more resources for other applications Increasing the recovery priority might speed up the recovery process by requesting the operating system to allocate more resources to the application that will perform the recovery However the resulting effect will depend on the overall CPU usage and other factors like disk I O speed or network traffic The preset is Normal Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 73 To specify the recovery process priority Select one of the following e Low to minimize resources taken by the recovery process leaving more resources to other processes running on the machine e Normal to run the rec
228. mber of attempts is performed depending on which comes first Failed Failed Succeded Idle Running Idle Running Idle Task state _ Interval between attempts t N 3 none of attempts succeeded Failed Failed Failed Failed lde Running Idle Running Idle Running idle Task state Lagj If the task fails because of a mistake in the backup plan you can edit the plan while the task is in the Idle state While the task is running you have to stop it prior to editing the backup plan 3 3 1 20 Additional settings Specify the additional settings for the backup operation by selecting or clearing the following check boxes Overwrite data on a tape without prompting for user confirmation This option is effective only when backing up to a tape device The preset is Disabled When starting backup to a non empty tape in a locally attached tape device the program will warn that you are about to lose data on the tape To disable this warning select this check box Dismount media after backup has finished This option is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems This option is effective when backing up to a removable media CD DVD tape or floppy disk The preset is Disabled The destination CD DVD can be ejected or the tape can be dismounted after the backup is completed 68 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Ask for the first media while backing up to removable media This option is effective
229. mdadm create dev md level 1 raid devices 2 dev sd ab mdadm create dev md1 level 1 raid devices 2 dev sd cd Run the following commands to create the logical volume group Caution The pvcreate command destroys all data on the dev md0 and dev md1 devices lvm pvcreate dev md dev md1 lvm vgcreate my_volgroup dev md dev md1 lvm vgdisplay The output of the lvm vgdisplay command will contain lines similar to the following Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 7 Volume group VG Name my_volgroup VG Access read write VG Status resizable VG Size 1 99 GB VG UUID qg0Q41 Vk7W yDG3 uF11 Q2AL C z8 vMeACu Run the following command to create the logical volume in the L parameter specify the size given by VG Size lvm lvcreate L1 99G name my_logvol my_volgroup Activate the volume group by running the following command lvm vgchange a y my_volgroup Press CTRL ALT F1 to return to the management console Step 2 Starting the recovery Ore Ne AB ae Sh oe 7 In the management console click Recover In Archive click Change and then specify the name of the archive In Backup click Change and then select the backup from which you want to recover data In Data type select Volumes In Items to recover select the check box next to my_volgroup my_logvol Under Where to recover click Change and then select the logical volume that you created in Step 1 Click the chevron buttons to e
230. media e One Click Restore is the minimal addition to a disk backup stored on removable media allowing for easy recovery from this backup If you boot a machine from the media and click Run Acronis One click Restore the disk will be immediately recovered from the backup contained on the same media Caution Because the one click approach does not presume user selections such as selecting volumes to recover Acronis One Click Restore always recovers the entire disk If your disk contains several volumes and you are planning to use Acronis One Click Restore include all the volumes in the backup Any volumes missing from the backup will be lost e Bootable agent is a bootable rescue utility based on Linux kernel that includes most of the functionality of the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent Put this component on the media if you want more functionality during recovery You will be able to configure the recovery operation in the same way as under regular bootable media use Active Restore or Universal Restore If the media is being created in Windows the disk management functionality will also be available 3 3 1 16 Error handling These options are effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media These options enable you to specify how to handle errors that might occur during backup Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode The preset is Disabled With the silent mode enabled the pro
231. most current version of the Software unless your unauthorized modifications prohibit or hamper such corrections or cause the malfunction or ii supply code corrections to correct insubstantial problems at the next general release of the Software More information about contacting Acronis Technical Support is available at the following link http www Acronis com enterprise support 16 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 2 Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 This section attempts to give its readers a clear understanding of the product so that they can use the product in various circumstances without step by step instructions 2 1 Basic concepts Please familiarize yourself with the basic notions used in the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 graphical user interface and documentation Advanced users are welcome to use this section as a step by step quick start guide The details can be found in the context help Backup under operating system 1 To protect data on a machine install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent p 207 on the machine which becomes a managed machine p 215 from this point on 2 To be able to manage the machine using Graphical User Interface install Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console p 211 on the same machine or any machine from which you prefer to operate If you have the standalone product edition skip this step since in your case the console installs with the agent
232. n be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer o If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device 2 In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Click OK 6 3 3 Datatype Choose what type of data to recover from the selected disk backup e Disks to recover disks e Volumes to recover volumes e Files to recover specific files and folders 140 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 6 3 4 Content selection The representation of this window depends on the type of data stored in the archive 6 3 4 1 Disks volumes selection To select a backup and disks volumes to recover 1 Select one of the successive backups by its creation date and time Thus you can revert the disk data to a certain moment in time Specify the items to recover By default all items of the selected backup will be selected If you do not want to recover certain items just uncheck them To obtain information on a disk volume right click it and then click Information 2 Click OK Selecting an MBR You will usually select the disk s MBR if
233. n from scratch e Adding the Acronis Plug in to a WIM file for any future purpose manual ISO building adding other tools to the image and so on To be able to perform any of the above operations install Bootable Media Builder on a machine where Windows Automated Installation Kit WAIK is installed If you do not have such machine prepare as described in How to create bootable media p 175 Bootable Media Builder supports only x86 WinPE 2 x This WnPE distribution can also work on x64 hardware A PE image based on Win PE 2 0 requires at least 256MB RAM to work The recommended memory size for PE 2 0 is 512MB Adding Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x ISO To add Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x ISO 1 When adding the plug in to the existing Win PE 2 ISO unpack all files of your Win PE 2 ISO to a separate folder on the hard disk 2 Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component 3 Select Bootable media type Windows PE When creating a new PE 2 ISO o Select Create Windows PE 2 x automatically o The software runs the appropriate script and proceeds to the next window When adding the plug in to the existing PE 2 ISO o Select Use WinPE files located in the folder I specify o Specify path to the folder where the WinPE files are located 4 optional Specify Windows drivers to be added to Windows PE 2 x Once you boot a machine into Windows PE t
234. n off the machine after the cloning operation check box is selected and disabled automatically 2 Click Finish to add the pending operation 3 Click Commit on the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window 4 Wait until the task is finished 5 Wait until the machine is turned off 6 Disconnect either the source or the target hard disk drive from the machine 7 Start up the machine If you need to leave an NT signature Click to clear the Copy NT signature check box if necessary Click to clear the Turn off the machine after the cloning operation check box if necessary 1 2 3 Click Finish to add the pending operation 4 Click Commit on the toolbar and then click Proceed in the Pending Operations window 5 Wait until the task is finished 6 11 5 3 Disk conversion MBR to GPT You would want to convert an MBR basic disk to a GPT basic disk in the following cases e lf you need more than 4 primary volumes on one disk e If you need additional disk reliability against any possible data damage If you need to convert a basic MBR disk to basic GPT 1 Select a basic MBR disk to convert to GPT 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to GPT in the context menu You will receive a warning window stating that you are about to convert MBR into GPT 3 By clicking OK you ll add a pending operation of MBR to GPT disk conversion To finish the added operation you will have to
235. n that disk will be unbootable To retain system bootability on the target disk volume choose one of the following e Select automatically A new NT signature will be created only if the existing one differs from the one in the backup Otherwise the existing NT signature will be kept e Create new The program will generate a new NT signature for the target hard disk drive e Recover from backup The program will replace the NT signature of the target hard disk with one from the disk backup Recovering the disk signature may be desirable due to the following reasons Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 143 o Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 creates scheduled tasks using the signature of the source hard disk If you recover the same disk signature you don t need to re create or edit the tasks created previously o Some installed applications use disk signature for licensing and other purposes o This enables to keep all the Windows Restore Points on the recovered disk o To recover VSS snapshots used by Windows Vista s Previous Versions feature e Keep existing The program will leave the existing NT signature of the target hard disk as is 6 3 6 2 Volumes Available volume destinations depend on the agents operating on the machine Recover to Physical machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows or Agent for Linux is installed The selected volumes will be recovered to the physical disks of th
236. nal Network port p 179 o the TCP port that the bootable agent listens for incoming connection The type of media to create You can Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 o create CD DVD or other bootable media such as removable USB flash drives if the hardware BIOS allows for boot from such media o build an ISO image of a bootable disc to burn it later on a blank disc o upload the selected components to Acronis PXE Server o upload the selected components to a WDS RIS 8 optional Windows system drivers to be used by Acronis Universal Restore p 180 This window appears only if the Acronis Universal Restore add on is installed and a media other than PXE or WDS RIS is selected 9 Path to the media ISO file or the name or IP and credentials for PXE or WDS RIS Kernel parameters This window lets you specify one or more parameters of the Linux kernel They will be automatically applied when the bootable media starts These parameters are typically used when experiencing problems while working with the bootable media Normally you can leave this field empty You also can specify any of these parameters by pressing F11 while in the boot menu Parameters When specifying multiple parameters separate them with spaces acpi off Disables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI You may want to use this parameter when experiencing problems with a particular hardware configuration noapic Disables Advanced Pro
237. nd so its result is not available 106 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 6 1 2 2 Working with backup plans and tasks Actions on backup plans and tasks The following is a guideline for you to perform operations with backup plans and tasks To Create a new backup plan or a task View details of a plan task View plan s task s log Run a plan task Do Click a New then select one of the following e Backup plan p 116 e Recovery task p 137 e Validation task p 156 Backup plan Click View details In the Plan Details p 113 window review the plan details Task Click View details In the Task Details p 111 window review the task details Backup plan Click View log You will be taken to the Log p 114 view containing the list of the plan related log entries Task Click _ View log You will be taken to the Log p 114 view containing the list of the task related log entries Backup plan Click gt Run In the Run Backup Plan p 111 window select the task you need to be run Running the backup plan starts the selected task of that plan immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Why can t I run the backup plan e Do not have the appropriate privilege Without the Administrator privileges on the machine a user cannot run plans owned by other users The task will be executed immediately in spite of its schedule and conditions Copyright Acronis Inc
238. nd then run the backup task 5 5 1 User is idle Applies to Windows User is idle means that a screen saver is running on the managed machine or the machine is locked Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 97 Example Run the backup task on the managed machine every day at 9PM preferably when the user is idle If the user is still active by 11PM run the task anyway e Event Daily every 1 day s Once at 09 00 00 PM e Condition User is idle e Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met Run the task anyway after 2 hour s As a result 1 If the user becomes idle before 9PM the backup task will start at 9PM 2 If the user becomes idle between 9PM and 11PM the backup task will start immediately after the user becomes idle 3 If the user is still active at 11PM the backup task starts anyway 5 5 2 Location s host is available Applies to Windows Linux Location s host is available means that the machine hosting the destination for storing archives ona networked drive is available Example Backing up data to the networked location is performed on workdays at 9 00 PM If the location s host is not available at that moment for instance due to maintenance work skip the backup and wait for the next workday to start the task It is assumed that the backup task should not be started at all rather than failed e Event Weekly Every 1 week s on lt workdays gt Once at 09 00 00 PM e Con
239. ne automatically if it is required for recovery This option is effective when recovery takes place on a machine running an operating system The preset is Disabled The option defines whether to reboot the machine automatically if it is required for recovery Such might be the case when a volume locked by the operating system has to be recovered Reboot machine after recovery This option is effective when operating under bootable media The preset is Disabled This option enables booting the machine into the recovered operating system without user interaction Change SID after the recovery is finished The preset is Disabled 78 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can generate an unique security identifier SID for the recovered system You do not need a new SID when recovering a system over itself or when creating a system replica that will replace the original system Generate a new SID if the original and the recovered systems will work concurrently in the same workgroup or domain Use FTP in Active mode The preset is Disabled Enable this option if the FTP server supports active mode and you want this mode to be used for file transfers Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 79 4 Vaults A vault is a location for storing backup archives For ease of use and administration a vault is associated with the archives metadata Referring to this metadata makes for fast and convenient oper
240. need interaction This window accumulates all the tasks that require user interaction in one place It enables you to specify your decision such as to confirm reboot or to retry after freeing up the disk space on each of the tasks Until at least one task requires interaction you can open this window at any time from the managed machine s Dashboard p 101 102 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 If you select the check box for the Do not show this window when tasks require interaction I will see this information in the tasks details and dashboard parameter the tasks will be displayed on the Dashboard among other alerts and warnings Alternatively you can review the task execution states in the Backup plans and tasks p 103 view and specify your decision on each task in the Information panel or in the Task details p 111 window 6 1 2 Backup plans and tasks The Backup plans and tasks view keeps you informed of data protection on a given machine It lets you monitor and manage backup plans and tasks A backup plan is a set of rules that specify how the given data will be protected on a given machine Physically a backup plan is a bundle of tasks configured for execution on a managed machine To find out what a backup plan is currently doing on the machine check the backup plan execution state p 103 A backup plan state is a cumulative state of the plan s tasks The status of a backup plan p 104 helps you to estimate whet
241. network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer 6 4 6 When to validate As validation is a resource intensive operation it makes sense to schedule validation to the managed machine s off peak period On the other hand if you prefer to be immediately informed whether the data is not corrupted and can be successfully recovered consider starting validation right after the task creation Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 159 Choose one of the following e Now to start the validation task right after its creation that is after clicking OK on the Validation page e Later to start the one time validation task at the date and time you specify Specify the appropriate parameters as follows o Date and time the date and time when to start the task o The task will be started manually do not schedule the task select this check box if you wish to start the task manually later e On schedule to schedule the task To learn more about how to configure the scheduling parameters please see the Scheduling p 87 section 6 5 Mounting an image Mounting volumes from a disk backup image lets you access the volumes as though they were physical disks Multiple volumes contained in the same backup can be mounted within a single mount operation The mount operation is available when the console is connected to a managed machine running either Windows or L
242. nfluence of all the methods shortcomings For example weekly differential backup facilitates archive cleanup because it can be easily deleted along with the weekly set of daily incremental backups depending on it Backing up with the full incremental or differential backup method results in a backup p 207 of the corresponding type Full backup A full backup stores all data selected for backup A full backup underlies any archive and forms the base for incremental and differential backups An archive can contain multiple full backups or consist of only full backups A full backup is self sufficient you do not need access to any other backup to recover data from a full backup Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 21 It is widely accepted that a full backup is the slowest to do but the fastest to restore With Acronis technologies recovery from an incremental backup may be not slower than recovery from a full one A full backup is most useful when e you need to roll back the system to its initial state e this initial state does not change often so there is no need for regular backup Example An Internet cafe school or university lab where the administrator often undoes changes made by the students or guests but rarely updates the reference backup in fact after installing software updates only The backup time is not crucial in this case and the recovery time will be minimal when recovering the systems from the full backup Th
243. ng a backup plan Before creating your first backup plan p 208 please familiarize yourself with the basic concepts p 17 used in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 116 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 To create a backup plan perform the following steps General Plan name Optional Enter a unique name for the backup plan A conscious name lets you identify the plan among others Plan s credentials p 119 Optional The backup plan will run on behalf of the user who is creating the plan You can change the plan account credentials if necessary To access this option select the Advanced view check box Comments Optional Type a description of the backup plan To access this option select the Advanced view check box What to backup Source type p 120 Select the type of data to back up The type of data depends on the agents installed on the machine Items to backup p 120 Specify the data items to back up A list of items to backup depends on the data type specified previously Access credentials p 121 Optional Provide credentials for the source data if the plan s account does not have access permissions to the data To access this option select the Advanced view check box Exclusions p 122 Optional Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to back up To access this option select the Advanced view check box Where to back up Archive p 123 Specify pa
244. nis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent 2 Start the console Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 6 Windows Start the console by selecting it from the start menu 3 Connect the console to the machine where the agent is installed Where to go from here For what to do next see Basic concepts p 17 For understanding of the GUI elements see the next section 1 2 1 Using the management console As soon as the console connects to a managed machine p 215 or to a management server p 216 the respective items appear across the console s workspace in the menu in the main area with the Welcome screen the Navigation pane the Actions and tools pane enabling you to perform agent specific or server specific operations Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Connected to This Machine Local Connection CY ee tem ee ee Welcome to Machinei2 The console is connected to the managed machine Choose the action to perform or the tool to use To check for warnings and review statistics navigate to the Dashboard view I Acronis Navigation i Mire vastbord Backup plans and tasks SD vaks Vaid tog Actions gt Disk management Shortcuts P Loca machine Msdinet P t Back up create a backup plan to p Create personal veut Create Acronis Secure Zone gt Mount image Manage mounted mages er the data from a backup archive created by yo
245. nis True Image Echo to Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Acronis Secure Zone will keep the archives created with Echo The zone will appear in the list of personal vaults and the old archives will be available for recovery 2 10 2 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager A modification of the bootable agent p 209 can be placed on a system disk and configured to start at boot time when F11 is pressed This eliminates the need for rescue media or network connection to start the bootable rescue utility This feature has the trade name Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs the user reboots the machine hits F11 on prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and performs data recovery in the same way as with ordinary bootable media The user can also back up using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager while on the move On machines with the GRUB boot loader installed the user selects the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager from the boot menu instead of pressing F11 Activation and deactivation of the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager The operation that enables using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is called activation To activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager select Actions gt Activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager from the program menu You can activate or deactivate the Acronis Startup Recovery Manager at any time from the Tools menu The d
246. nned e striped RAID 0 e mirrored RAID 1 e amirror of stripes RAID 0 1 e RAIDS Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 33 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 can back up and recover dynamic volumes and with minor limitations basic GPT volumes Backing up dynamic volumes Dynamic and basic GPT volumes are backed up in the same way as basic MBR volumes When creating a backup plan through the GUI all types of volumes are available for selection as Items to back up When using the command line specify the dynamic and GPT volumes with the DYN prefix Command line examples trueimagecmd create partition DYN1 DYN2 asz This will back up DYN1 and DYN2 volumes to the Acronis Secure Zone trueimagecmd create harddisk DYN asz This will back up all dynamic volumes in the system to the Acronis Secure Zone The boot code on basic GPT volumes is not backed up or recovered Recovering dynamic volumes A dynamic volume can be recovered e over any type of existing volume e to unallocated space of a disk group e to unallocated space of a basic disk Recovery over an existing volume When a dynamic volume is recovered over an existing volume either basic or dynamic the target volume s data is overwritten with the backup content The type of target volume basic simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 0 1 RAID 5 will not change The target volume size has to be enough to accommodate the backup content Recovery to disk gro
247. node in case of networking problems or failure of the storage node e recovery of the storage node itself Export from an HDD based vault to a tape device can be considered as simple on demand archive staging The resulting archive s name By default the exported archive inherits the name of the original archive Because having multiple archives of the same names in the same location is not advisable the following actions are disabled with the default archive name e exporting part of an archive to the same location e exporting an archive or part of an archive to a location where an archive of the same name exists e exporting an archive or part of an archive to the same location twice In any of the above cases provide an archive name that is unique to the destination folder or vault If you need to redo the export using the same archive name first delete the archive that resulted from the previous export operation The resulting archive s options The exported archive inherits the options of the original archive including encryption and the password When exporting a password protected archive you are prompted for the password If the original archive is encrypted the password is used to encrypt the resulting archive Source and destination locations When the console is connected to a managed machine you can export an archive or part of an archive to and from any location accessible to the agent residing on the machine These incl
248. nt for Agent for Storage Media Windows Tape written Bootable Media ATIE 9 1 on a locally attached tape ATIE 9 5 device tape drive or tape ATIE 9 7 library by ABR10 Agent for ATIE 9 1 Windows ATIE 9 5 ATIE 9 7 ABR10 F Agent for Linux ATIE 9 1 ATIE 9 5 ATIE 9 7 ABR10 or 36 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Tape written Backup Server ATIE 9 1 ona tape device ATIE 9 5 through ATIE 9 7 Storage Node ABR10 2 9 2 Using a single tape drive A tape drive that is locally attached to a managed machine can be used by local backup plans as a storage device The functionality of a locally attached autoloader or tape library is limited to the ordinary tape drive This means that the program can only work with the currently mounted tape and you have to mount tapes manually Backup to a locally attached tape device When creating a backup plan you are able to select the locally attached tape device as the backup destination An archive name is not needed when backing up to a tape An archive can span multiple tapes but can contain only one full backup and an unlimited number of incremental backups Every time you create a full backup you start with a new tape and create a new archive As soon as the tape is full a dialog window with a request to insert a new tape will appear The content of a non empty tape will be overwritten on prompt You have an option to disable prompts
249. o The operating system cannot boot o The disk is new and does not have an MBR o Recovering custom or non Windows boot loaders such as LILO and GRUB o The disk geometry is different to that stored in the backup There are probably other times when you may need to recover the MBR but the above are the most common When recovering the MBR of one disk to another Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 recovers Track O which does not affect the target disk s partition table and partition layout Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 automatically updates Windows loaders after recovery so there is no need to recover the MBR and Track 0 for Windows systems unless the MBR is damaged 6 3 4 2 Files selection To select a backup and files to recover 1 Select one of the successive backups by its creation date time Thus you can revert the files folders to a specific moment in time 2 Specify the files and folders to recover by selecting the corresponding check boxes in the archives tree Selecting a folder automatically selects all its nested folders and files Use the table to the right of the archives tree to select the nested items Selecting the check box for the Name column s header automatically selects all items in the table Clearing this check box automatically deselects all the items 3 Click OK 6 3 5 Access credentials for location Specify the credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive is stored
250. o create the commit creating of the recovery task 6 3 1 Task credentials Provide credentials for the account under which the task will run To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Run under the current user The task will run under the credentials with which the user who starts the tasks is logged on If the task has to run on schedule you will be asked for the current user s password on completing the task creation o Use the following credentials The task will always run under the credentials you specify whether started manually or executed on schedule Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK To learn more about using credentials in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 see the Owners and credentials p 23 section Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 139 To learn more about operations available depending on the user privileges see the User privileges on a managed machine p 23 section 6 3 2 Archive selection Selecting the archive 1 Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired folder in the folders tree o Ifthe archive is stored in a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the vault o Ifthe archive is stored in a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the va
251. oceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below New virtual machine p 146 If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows is installed The selected disks will be recovered to a new virtual machine of any of the following types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC Parallels Workstation or Citrix XenServer virtual appliance The virtual machine files will be saved to the destination you specify If Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed These agents enable creating a new virtual machine on the virtualization server you specify The new virtual machine will be configured automatically the source machine configuration being copied where possible The configuration is displayed in the Virtual Machine Settings p 147 section Check the settings and make changes if necessary Then you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Existing virtual machine Available when the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Hyper V or Agent for ESX ESXi is installed On selecting this you specify the virtualization server and the target virtual machine Then you proceed to the regular disk mapping procedure described below Please be aware that the target machine will be powered off automatically before the recovery If you prefer to power it off manually modify the VM power management option Disk Disk MODE
252. off If one of the users is still logged on at 11 PM run the task anyway Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 99 e Event Monthly Months lt All gt On lt First gt lt Third gt lt Friday gt Once at 08 00 00 PM e Condition User logged off e Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met Run the task anyway after 3 hour s As a result 1 If all users are logged off at 8PM the backup task will start at 8PM 2 If the last user logs off between 8PM and 11PM the backup task will start immediately after the user has logged off 3 If any of the users is still logged on at 11PM the backup task starts anyway 5 5 5 Time since last backup Applies to Windows Linux Enables to put a backup task run on hold until the specified time interval since the last successful backup completion passes Example Run the backup task after free space on the managed machine has changed by at least 1 GB but only if more than 12 hours have passed since the last successful backup e Event When free space changed Run task if free space has changed by at least 1 GB e Condition Time since last backup Time since the last backup 12 hour s e Task start conditions Wait until the conditions are met As a result 1 if the free space changes by more than 1GB before 12 hours pass since the successful completion of the last backup the scheduler will wait until 12 hours pass and then will start the task 2 if the f
253. om the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk or volume backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Both procedures are resource intensive Validation of an archive will validate all the archive s backups A vault or a location validation will validate all archives stored in this vault location While successful validation means high probability of successful recovery it does not check all factors that influence the recovery process If you back up the operating system only a test recovery in bootable environment to a spare hard drive can guarantee success of the recovery At least ensure that the backup can be successfully validated using the bootable media Different ways to create a validation task Using the Validation page is the most general way to create a validation task Here you can validate immediately or set up a validation schedule for any backup archive or location you have permission to access Validation of an archive or of the latest backup in the archive can be scheduled as part of the backup plan For more information see the Creating a backup plan p 116 section You can access the Validation page from the Vaults p 80 view Right click the object to validate archive backup or vault and select Validate from the context menu The Validation page will be opened with the pre selected object as a source All you need to do is to select when to validate and optionally provide a
254. omain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK 6 2 6 Exclusions Set up exclusions for the specific types of files you do not wish to back up For example you may not want database hidden and system files and folders as well as files with specific extensions to be stored in the archive To specify which files and folders to exclude Set up any of the following parameters e Exclude all hidden files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the Hidden attribute If a folder is Hidden all of its contents including files that are not Hidden will be excluded e Exclude all system files and folders Select this check box to skip files and folders with the System attribute If a folder is System all of its contents including files that are not System will be excluded You can view file or folder attributes in the file folder properties or by using the attrib command For more information refer to the Help and Support Center in Windows e Exclude files matching the following criteria Select this check box to skip files whose names match any of the criteria called file masks in the list use the Add Edit Remove and Remove All buttons to create the list of file masks You can use one or more wildcard characters and ina file mask The asterisk substitutes for zero or more characters in a file name for example the file mask Doc txt yields files such as Doc
255. on Recover Disk MBR to If the Master Boot Record is selected for recovery Disk p 145 Choose the disk to recover the Master Boot Record to NT signature p 143 144 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Select the way the disk s signature contained in the MBR will be handled The disk signature is used by Windows and the Linux kernel version 2 6 and later Recover Volume Letter to Disk Volume p 145 Sequentially map each of the source volumes to a volume or an unallocated space on the destination disk Size p 145 Optional Change the recovered volume size location and other properties MBR destination To specify a destination disk 1 Select the disk to recover the MBR to 2 Click OK Volume destination To specify a destination volume 1 Select a volume or unallocated space where you want the selected volume to be recovered to The destination volume unallocated space should be at least the same size as the uncompressed image data 2 Click OK All the data stored on the target volume will be replaced by the backed up data so be careful and watch out for non backed up data that you might need When using bootable media Disk letters seen under Windows style bootable media might differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D drive in the rescue utility might correspond to the E drive in Windows Be careful To be on the safe side it is advisable to assign uniq
256. on Environment 206 209 220 Working under bootable media 183 Working with backup plans and tasks 107 Working with the 81 226 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009
257. on select or clear the check box for Show the Dashboard view upon connection of the console to a machine This option can also be set on the Welcome screen If you select the check box for At startup show the Dashboard instead of the current view on the Welcome screen the setting mentioned above will be updated accordingly 3 1 2 Pop up messages About tasks that need interaction This option is effective when the console is connected to a managed machine or to the management server The option defines whether to display the pop up window when one or more tasks require user interaction This window enables you to specify your decision such as to confirm reboot or to retry after freeing up the disk space on all the tasks in the same place Until at least one task requires interaction you can open this window at any time from the managed machine s Dashboard Alternatively you can review the task execution states in the Tasks view and specify you decision on each task in the Information pane The preset is Enabled To make a selection select or clear the Pop up the Tasks Need Interaction window check box About the task execution results This option is effective only when the console is connected to a managed machine Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 44 The option defines whether to display the pop up messages about task run results successful completion failure or success with warnings When displaying of pop up messag
258. on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted on a mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself o Ifthe archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer o Ifthe archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device 2 In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you
259. on defines whether to back up NTFS permissions for files along with the files The preset is Enabled When the option is enabled files and folders are saved in the archive with the original permissions to read write or execute the files for each user or user group If you recover a secured file folder on a machine without the user account specified in the permissions you may not be able to read or modify this file To completely eliminate this kind of problem disable preserving file security settings in archives The recovered files and folders will always inherit the permissions from the folder to which they are recovered or from the disk if recovered to the root Alternatively you can disable recovery p 74 of the security settings even if they are available in the archive The result will be the same the files will inherit the permissions from the parent folder To access file or folder NTFS permissions select Properties gt Security 3 3 1 15 Media components This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems when the backup destination is removable media 64 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 When backing up to removable media you can make this media work as regular Linux based bootable media p 209 by writing additional components to it As a result you will not need a separate rescue disc The preset is None selected Select the check boxes for the components you want to put on the bootable
260. on on the data selected for backup e Source type the type of data p 120 selected for backing up e Items to back up items selected to back up and their size Destination The Destination tab provides the following information e Location name of the vault or path to the folder where the archive is stored e Archive name name of the archive e Archive comments comments on the archive if provided Settings The Settings tab displays the following information e Backup scheme the selected backup scheme and all its settings with schedules e Validation if selected events before or after which the validation is performed and validation schedule Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 113 e Backup options backup options changed against the default values 6 1 3 Log The Log stores the history of operations performed by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 on the machine or actions a user takes on the machine using the program For instance when a user edits a task the respective entry is added to the log When the program executes a task it adds multiple entries With the log you can examine operations results of tasks execution including reasons for failure if any Way of working with log entries e Use filters to display the desired log entries You can also hide the unneeded columns and show the hidden ones See the Filtering and sorting log entries p 115 section for details e Inthe log table sel
261. on the machine a user can modify tasks and local backup plans owned by any user registered in the operating system When a user opens a plan or task for editing which is owned by another user all passwords set in the task are cleared This prevents the modify settings leave passwords trick The program displays a warning each time you are trying to edit a plan task last modified by another user On seeing the warning you have two options e Click Cancel and create your own plan or task The original task will remain intact e Continue editing You will have to enter all credentials required for the plan or task execution Archive owner An archive owner is the user who saved the archive to the destination To be more precise this is the user whose account was specified when creating the backup plan in the Where to back up step By default the plan s credentials are used Plan s credentials and task credentials Any task running on a machine runs on behalf of a user When creating a plan or a task you have the option to explicitly specify an account under which the plan or the task will run Your choice depends on whether the plan or task is intended for manual start or for executing on schedule Manual start You can skip the Plan s Task credentials step Every time you start the task the task will run under the credentials with which you are currently logged on Any person that has administrative privileges on the machine can
262. onis Inc 2000 2009 Temporarily disabling a backup plan 83 84 111 Time since last backup 100 Time based alerts 45 Tower of Hanoi 209 218 Tower of Hanoi backup scheme 29 218 Tower of Hanoi scheme 129 Types of dynamic volumes 199 U Understanding Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 17 Understanding states and statuses 103 Universal Restore 14 138 150 180 Universal Restore Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Universal Restore 37 40 137 150 219 Unmanaged vault 207 219 User is idle 97 User logged off 99 User privileges on a managed machine 23 119 140 157 166 Using a single tape drive 37 Using the management console 7 V Validating vaults archives and backups 83 84 85 107 156 Validation 17 207 218 219 Validation rules 208 219 Vault 17 38 172 214 216 219 Vaults 33 80 156 172 Views 11 Virtual machine 210 220 Virtual machine settings 142 144 147 152 Virtual machine type virtualization server selection 142 144 146 Volume destination 143 145 Volume operations 198 Volume properties 145 225 Volume selection 161 162 Volume Shadow Copy Service 49 54 57 Volumes 138 144 W Weekly schedule 90 130 When to recover 138 150 When to validate 157 159 Why is the program asking for the password 119 Windows event log 46 51 61 72 76 WinPE Windows Preinstallati
263. only when backing up to removable media The option defines whether to display the Insert First Media prompt when backing up to removable media The preset is Enabled When the option is enabled backing up to removable media may be not possible if the user is away because the program will wait for someone to press OK in the prompt box Hence you should disable the prompt when scheduling a backup to removable media Then if the removable media is available for example a DVD is inserted the task can run unattended Reset archive bit The option is effective only for file level backup in Windows operating systems and in bootable media The preset is Disabled In Windows operating systems each file has the File is ready for archiving attribute available by selecting File gt Properties gt General gt Advanced gt Archive and Index attributes This attribute also known as the archive bit is set by the operating system each time the file is changed and can be reset by backup applications each time they include the file in a backup The archive bit value is used by various applications such as databases When the Reset archive bit check box is selected Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will reset the archive bits of all files being backed up Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 itself does not use the archive bit value When performing incremental or differential backup it determines whether a file has changed by the file size an
264. onsolidation always have maximum compression 4 2 4 Filtering and sorting archives The following is a guideline for you to filter and sort archives in the archives table To Do Sort backup archives by any Click the column s header to sort the archives in ascending order column ea ee Click it once again to sort the archives in descending order Filter archives by name In the field below the corresponding column s header type the archive name owner or machine the owner name or the machine name As a result you will see the list of the archives whose names owner names or machine names fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Configuring the archives table By default the table has seven columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the displayed columns and show hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to column headers presented in the table 2 Click the items you want to be displayed hidden 86 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 5 Scheduling Acronis scheduler helps the administrator adapt backup plans to the company s daily routine and each employee s work style The plans tasks will be launched systematically keeping the critical data safely protected The scheduler uses local time of the machine the backup plan exists on Before creating a schedule be
265. or if it is not present in the archive create the structure manually 6 10 5 2 Creating the volume structure manually The following are a general procedure for recovering MD devices and logical volumes by using a Linux based bootable media and an example of such recovery You can use a similar procedure in Linux To recover MD devices and logical volumes 1 2 3 4 Boot the machine from a Linux based bootable media Click Acronis Bootable Agent Then click Run management console On the toolbar click Actions and then click Start shell Alternatively you can press CTRL ALT F2 If necessary examine the structure of volumes which are stored in the archive by using the trueimagecmd utility Also you can use the trueimagemnt utility to mount one or more of these volumes as if they were regular volumes see Mounting backup volumes later in this topic Create the volume structure according to that in the archive by using the mdadm utility for MD devices the lvm utility for logical volumes or both Note Logical Volume Manager utilities such as pvcreate and vgcreate which are normally available in Linux are not included in the bootable media environment so you need to use the lvm utility with a corresponding commana lvm pvcreate lvm vgcreate etc If you previously mounted the backup by using the trueimagemnt utility use this utility again to unmount the backup see Mounting backup volumes later in this topic
266. or to your choice of backups belonging to the same archive An entire vault p 219 can be exported by using the command line interface 214 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 F Full backup A self sufficient backup p 207 containing all data chosen for backup You do not need access to any other backup to recover the data from a full backup G GFS Grandfather Father Son A popular backup scheme p 209 aimed to maintain the optimal balance between a backup archive p 207 size and the number of recovery points p 217 available from the archive GFS enables recovering with daily resolution for the last several days weekly resolution for the last several weeks and monthly resolution for any time in the past For more information please refer to GFS backup scheme p 25 Image The same as Disk backup p 212 Incremental backup A backup p 207 that stores changes to the data against the latest backup You need access to other backups from the same archive p 207 to restore data from an incremental backup L Local backup plan A backup plan p 208 created on a managed machine p 215 using direct management p 212 Local task A task p 218 belonging to a local backup plan p 215 or a task that does not belong to any plan such as a recovery task A local task belonging to a backup plan can be modified by editing the plan only other local tasks can be modified directly M Machine A physical or v
267. ost cases the data will be reverted to that moment Examples of exceptions to this rule Recovering a database from a backup that contains the transaction log a single backup provides multiple recovery points and so you can make additional selections Recovering multiple files from a file backup taken without snapshot each file will be reverted to the moment when it was actually copied to the backup You also specify the destination where to recover the data You can customize the recovery operation using recovery options such as pre post recovery commands error handling or notification options Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 19 The following diagram illustrates data recovery under the operating system online No backup can proceed on the machine while the recovery operation is taking place If required you can connect the console to another machine and configure a recovery operation on that machine This ability remote parallel recovery first appeared in Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 the previous Acronis products do not provide it Managed Machine Vault Archive 1 F Backup 0 Console 4 mv A Control Backup Plan 1 Task 1 F Backup 1 Full backup f F Backup 2 Backup Plan 2 z l Create Task 1 Full backup PONSA ONA Diferential backup Restore task Restore Data2 from Backup 4 Recovery using bootable media Recovery over a volume locked by the operating syste
268. overy process with normal speed allocating resources on a par with other processes e High to maximize the recovery process speed by taking resources from the other processes 3 3 2 3 File level security This option is effective only for recovery from file level backup of Windows files This option defines whether to recover NTFS permissions for files along with the files The preset is Recover files with their security settings If the file NTFS permissions were preserved during backup p 64 you can choose whether to recover the permissions or let the files inherit the NTFS permissions from the folder to which they are recovered 3 3 24 Notifications Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the ability of notifying users about recovery completion through e mail or the messaging service E mail This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option enables you to receive e mail notifications about the recovery task s successful completion failure or need for interaction along with the full log of the task The preset is Disabled To configure e mail notification 1 Select the Send e mail notifications check box to activate notifications 2 In the E mail addresses field type the e mail address to which notifications will be sent You can enter several addresses separated by semicolons 3 Under Send notifications select the a
269. p captures only data changes To speed up the backup process the program determines whether a file has changed or not by the file size and the date time when the file was last modified Disabling this feature will make the program compare the entire file contents to those stored in the archive 3 3 1 13 Backup splitting This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media The option defines how a backup can be split The preset is Automatic The following settings are available Automatic With this setting Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will act as follows When backing up to a hard disk A single backup file will be created if the destination disk s file system allows the estimated file size The backup will automatically be split into several files if the destination disk s file system does not allow the estimated file size Such might be the case when the backup is placed on FAT16 and FAT32 file systems that have a 4GB file size limit If the destination disk runs out of free space while creating the backup the task enters the Need interaction state You have the ability to free additional space and retry the operation If you do so the resulting backup will be split into the parts created before and after the retry When backing up to removable media CD DVD or a tape device locally attached to the managed machine The task will enter the Need interaction state and ask for a new medi
270. p you want to convert Click Recover as virtual machine The Recover data page opens with the pre selected backup In Data type select Disks or Volumes depending on what you need to convert In Content select the disks to convert or the volumes with the Master Boot Records MBR of the corresponding disks In Recover to select New virtual machine In VM server select the type of the new virtual machine to be created or on which virtualization server to create the machine In VM name enter the name for the new virtual machine Optionally Review the Virtual machine settings p 147 and make changes if necessary Here you can change the path to the new virtual machine The same type of machines with the same name cannot be created in the same folder Change either the VM name or the path if you get an error message caused by identical names Select the destination disk for each of the source disks or source volumes and MBRs On a Microsoft Virtual PC be sure to recover the disk or volume where the operating system s loader resides to the Hard disk 1 Otherwise the operating system will not boot This cannot be fixed by changing the boot device order in BIOS because a Virtual PC ignores these settings In When to recover specify when to start the recovery task Optionally Review Recovery options and change the settings from the default ones if need be You can specify in Recovery options gt VM power management whether to s
271. pecify the appropriate settings as follows Backup Set up the backup schedule when and how often to back up the data To learn more about setting up the schedule see the Scheduling p 87 section Retention rule With the simple scheme only one retention rule p 31 is available Set the retention period for the backups 6 2 9 4 Grandfather Father Son scheme At a glance e Daily incremental weekly differential and monthly full backups e Custom day for weekly and monthly backups e Custom retention periods for backups of each type Description Let us suppose that we want to set up a backup plan that will regularly produce a series of daily D weekly W and monthly M backups Here is a natural way to do this the following table shows a sample two month period for such a plan a EEE per Lo fo fe Do i Pome ole fel ME pew Toole le BE Prom Toole le ME eo ee on ee ou eee ereas fo foj ofo Mm oe ee Daily backups run every workday except Friday which is left for weekly and monthly backups Monthly backups run every fourth Friday and weekly backups run on all other Fridays e Monthly Grandfather backups are full e Weekly Father backups are differential e Daily Son backups are incremental 126 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Parameters You can set up the following parameters of a Grandfather Father Son GFS scheme Start backup at Specifies when to start a backup
272. pplication Event Log of Windows Choose one of the following e Use the setting set in the Machine options to use the setting specified for the machine For more information refer to Machine options p 46 e Log the following event types to log events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log Specify the types of events to be logged o All events log all events information warnings and errors o Errors and warnings o Errors only e Do not log to disable logging events of the backup operations in the Application Event Log SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events of the backup operations to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 string identifying the type of event Information Warning Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 string containing the text description of the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in its log The preset is Use the setting set in the Machine options To select whether to
273. ppropriate check boxes as follows o When backup completes successfully to send a notification when the backup task has completed successfully o When backup fails to send a notification when the backup task has failed The When user interaction is required check box is always selected 4 For the e mail message to include the log entries related to the backup select the Add full log to the notification check box 74 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 5 Click Additional e mail parameters to configure additional e mail parameters as follows then click OK o From type the e mail address of the user from whom the message will be sent If you leave this field empty messages will be constructed as if they are from the destination address o Use encryption you can opt for encrypted connection to the mail server SSL and TLS encryption types are available for selection o Some Internet service providers require authentication on the incoming mail server before being allowed to send something If this is your case select the Log on to incoming mail server check box to enable a POP server and to set up its settings e Incoming mail server POP enter the name of the POP server e Port set the port of the POP server By default the port is set to 110 e User name enter the user name e Password enter the password o Select the Use the specified outgoing mail server check box to enable an SMTP server and to
274. pt For example if a full backup has become subject to deletion but there are incremental or differential backups that depend on it the deletion is postponed until all the dependent backups can be deleted as well For more information see Retention rules p 31 Resulting tasks Any custom scheme always produces three backup tasks and in case the retention rules are specified a cleanup task Each task is listed in the list of tasks either as Scheduled if the schedule has been set up or as Manual if the schedule has not been set up You can manually run any backup task or cleanup task at any time regardless of whether it has a schedule In the first of the previous examples we set up a schedule only for full backups However the scheme will still result in three backup tasks enabling you to manually start a backup of any type e Full backup runs every Friday at 10 00 PM e Incremental backup runs manually e Differential backup runs manually 134 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 You can run any of these backup tasks by selecting it from the list of tasks in the Backup plans and tasks section in the left pane If you have also specified the retention rules in your backup scheme the scheme will result in four tasks three backup tasks and one cleanup task 6 2 10 Archive validation Set up the validation task to check if the backed up data is recoverable If the backup could not pass the validation successfully
275. px 816307 Best practices for using dynamic disks on Windows Server 2003 based computers http support microsoft com kb 816307 Dynamic group A group of machines p 215 which is populated automatically by the management server p 216 according to membership criteria specified by the administrator Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 offers the following membership criteria e Operating system e Active Directory organization unit Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 213 e P address range A machine remains in a dynamic group as long as the machine meets the group s criteria The machine is removed from the group automatically as soon as e the machine s properties change so that the machine does not meet the criteria anymore OR e the administrator changes the criteria so that the machine does not meet them anymore There is no way to remove a machine from a dynamic group manually except for deleting the machine from the management server Dynamic volume Any volume located on dynamic disks p 213 or more precisely on a disk group p 212 Dynamic volumes can span multiple disks Dynamic volumes are usually configured depending on the desired goal e to increase the volume size a spanned volume e to reduce the access time a striped volume e to achieve fault tolerance by introducing redundancy mirrored and RAID 5 volumes E Encrypted archive A backup archive p 207 encrypted according to the Advanced Encryp
276. quests is performed simultaneously with recovery the system operation can slow down even if recovery priority in the recovery options is set to Low This way the system downtime is reduced to a minimum at the cost of a temporary performance downgrade Usage scenarios 1 The system uptime is one of the efficiency criteria Examples Client oriented online services Web retailers polling stations 2 The system storage space ratio is heavily biased toward storage Some machines are being used as storage facilities where the operating system claims a small space segment and all other disk space is committed to storage such as movies sounds or other multimedia files Some of these storage volumes can be extremely large as compared to the system and so practically all the recovery time will be dedicated to recovering the files which might be used much later on if in any near future at all If you opt for Acronis Active Restore the system will be operational in a short time Users will be able to open the necessary files from the storage and use them while the rest of the files which are not immediately necessary are being recovered in the background Examples movie collection storage music collection storage multimedia storage How to use 1 Back up the system disk or volume to a location accessible through the system s BIOS This may be Acronis Secure Zone a USB hard drive a flash drive or any internal hard drive If your ope
277. r matched with the disk NT signature which is kept in the MBR disk record But two disks with the same NT signature cannot work properly under one operating system If there are two disks having the same NT signature and comprising of a system volume on a machine at the startup the operating system runs from the first disk discovers the same signature on the second one automatically generates a new unique NT signature and assigns it to the second disk As a result all the volumes on the second disk will lose their letters all paths will be invalid on the disk and programs won t find their files The operating system on that disk will be unbootable You have the following two alternatives to retain system bootability on the target disk volume 1 Copy NT signature to provide the target disk with the source disk NT signature matched with the Registry keys also copied on the target disk 2 Leave NT signature to keep the old target disk signature and update the operating system according to the signature 194 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 If you need to copy the NT signature 1 Select the Copy NT signature check box You receive the warning If there is an operating system on the hard disk uninstall either the source or the target hard disk drive from your machine prior to starting the machine again Otherwise the OS will start from the first of the two and the OS on the second disk will become unbootable The Tur
278. r WinPE p 206 enables running the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent p 207 in the preinstallation environment 220 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Index A About Windows loaders 155 Access credentials 160 162 Access credentials for archive location 117 124 Access credentials for destination 138 149 165 169 Access credentials for location 138 141 Access credentials for source 117 121 157 159 165 167 Acronis Active Restore 37 41 137 138 150 206 219 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components 13 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 overview 6 Acronis Plug in for WinPE 206 209 220 Acronis Secure Zone 38 169 206 219 Acronis Secure Zone Disk 170 Acronis Secure Zone Size 170 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager 39 137 173 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ASRM 193 206 219 Action pages 9 12 Actions on backup plans and tasks 103 107 Actions on log entries 114 Actions on personal vaults 81 82 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x 175 180 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x 175 181 Additional settings 37 50 68 71 78 Administering a managed machine 101 Agent Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent 17 207 209 211 212 214 215 217 218 220 Agent for Windows 13 Agent side cleanup 207 218 Agent side validation 207 218 Archive 117 123 206 207 Archive protection 4
279. r factors like disk in out speed or network traffic The preset is Low 58 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 To specify the backup process priority Select one of the following e Low to minimize resources taken by the backup process leaving more resources to other processes running on the machine e Normal to run the backup process with normal speed allocating resources on a par with other processes e High to maximize the backup process speed by taking resources from other processes HDD writing speed This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media This option is available when an internal fixed hard disk of the machine being backed up is selected as the backup destination Backing up to a fixed hard disk for example to Acronis Secure Zone may slow performance of the operating system and applications because of the large amounts of data that needs to be written to the disk You can limit the hard disk usage by the backup process to the desired level The preset is Maximum To set the desired HDD writing speed for backup Do any of the following e Click Writing speed stated as a percentage of the maximum speed of the destination hard disk and then drag the slider or select a percentage in the box e Click Writing speed stated in kilobytes per second and then enter the writing speed in kilobytes per second Network connection speed This option is effective for Windows an
280. rating system and its loader reside on different volumes always include both volumes in the backup The volumes must also be recovered together otherwise there is a high risk that the operating system will not start 2 Create bootable media 3 If a system failure occurs boot the machine using the bootable media Start the console and connect to the bootable agent 42 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 4 Configure the system recovery select the system disk or volume and select the Use Acronis Active Restore check box Acronis Active Restore will choose for the boot up and subsequent recovery the first operating system found during the backup scan Do not try to recover more than one operating system using Active Restore if you want the result to be predictable When recovering a multi boot system choose only one system volume and boot volume at a time 5 Once the system recovery is started the operating system boots from the backup The Acronis Active Restore icon appears in the system tray The machine becomes operational and ready to provide necessary services The immediate user sees the drive tree and icons and can open files or launch applications even though they were not yet recovered The Acronis Active Restore drivers intercept system queries and set the immediate priority for recovery of the files that are necessary to serve the incoming requests While this on the fly recovery proceeds the continuing recovery process is
281. rched and passed to the operating system which installs them automatically when first started The Windows default driver storage folder is determined in the registry value DevicePath which can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE WMicrosoft Windows CurrentVersion This storage folder is usually WINDOWS inf 2 Manual selection of the mass storage device driver If the target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as a SCSI RAID or Fibre Channel adapter for the hard disk you can install the appropriate driver manually bypassing the automatic driver search and install procedure 3 Installing drivers for Plug and Play devices 40 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Universal Restore relies on the built in Plug and Play discovery and configuration process to handle hardware differences in devices that are not critical for the system start such as video audio and USB Windows takes control over this process during the logon phase and if some of the new hardware is not detected you will have a chance to install drivers for it later manually Universal Restore and Microsoft Sysprep Universal Restore is not a system preparation tool You can apply it to any Windows image created by Acronis products including images of systems prepared with Microsoft System Preparation Tool Sysprep The following is an example of using both tools on the same system Universal Restore does not strip the security id
282. rd disk drives Shortcuts bar The Shortcuts bar appears under the navigation tree It offers you an easy and convenient way of connection to the machines in demand by adding them as shortcuts To add a shortcut to a machine 1 Connect the console to a managed machine 2 Inthe navigation tree right click the machine s name a root element of the navigation tree and then select Create shortcut 8 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 If the console and agent are installed on the same machine the shortcut to this machine will be added to the shortcuts bar automatically as Local machine Machine name Leeda Actions and tools pane The Actions and tools pane enables you to easily and efficiently work with Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 The pane s bars provide quick access to program s operations and tools All items of the Actions and tools bar are duplicated in the program menu Bars Item s name actions Contains a set of actions that can be performed on the items selected in any of the navigation views Clicking the action opens the respective action page p 12 Items of different navigation views have their own set of actions The bar s name changes in accordance with the item you select For example if you select the backup plan named System backup in the Backup plans and tasks view the actions bar will be named as System backup actions and will have the set of actions typical to backup plans All actions can
283. red month or several months Suppose that the task goes into effect on 11 01 2009 e During northern winter the task runs once at 10PM on every workday e During northern spring and autumn the task runs every 12 hours on all workdays e During northern summer the task runs every first and fifteenth of every month at 10 PM Thus the following three schedules are added to the task First schedule 1 Months December January February 2 On lt All gt lt All workdays gt 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set Second schedule 1 Months March April May September October November 2 On lt All gt lt All workdays gt 3 Every 12 hours From 12 00 00 AM Until 12 00 00 PM 4 Effective 94 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 From 11 01 2009 To not set Third schedule 1 Months June July August 2 Days 1 15 3 Once at 10 00 00 PM 4 Effective From 11 01 2009 To not set 5 4 At Windows Event Log event This type of schedule is effective only in Windows operating systems You can schedule a backup task to start when a certain Windows event has been recorded in one of the event logs such as the Application Security or System log For example you may want to set up a backup plan that will automatically perform an emergency full backup of your data as soon as Windows discovers that your hard disk drive is about to fail Parameters Log name
284. ree space changes by more than 1GB after 12 hours pass since the last backup successful completion the backup task will start immediately 3 if the free space never changes by more than 1GB the task will never start You can start the backup manually if need be in the Backup plans and tasks view 100 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 6 Direct management This section covers operations that can be performed directly on a managed machine by using the direct console agent connection The content of this section is applicable to both stand alone and advanced editions of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 6 1 Administering a managed machine This section describes the views that are available through the navigation tree of the console connected to a managed machine and explains how to work with each view 6 1 1 Dashboard Use the Dashboard to estimate at a glance whether the data is successfully protected on the machine The dashboard shows the summary of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent s activities and enables you to rapidly identify and resolve any issues Alerts The alerts section draws your attention to issues that have occurred on the machine and offers you ways of fixing or examining them The most critical issues are displayed on the top If there are no alerts or warnings at the moment the system displays No alerts or warnings Types of alerts The table below illustrates the types of messages you may observe
285. requency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of days Advanced scheduling settings are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window 88 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Examples Simple daily schedule Run the task every day at 6PM The schedule s parameters are thus set up as follows 1 2 Every 1 day s Once at 06 00 00 PM Effective From not set The task will be started on the current day if it has been created before 6PM If you have created the task after 6 PM the task will be started for the first time on the next day at 6 PM To not set The task will be performed for an indefinite number of days Three hour time interval lasting for three months schedule Run the task every three
286. reset is Maximum log size 1 GB On cleanup keep 95 of the maximum log size When the option is enabled the program compares the actual log size with the maximum size after every 100 log entries Once the maximum log size is exceeded the program deletes the oldest log entries You can select the amount of log entries to retain The default 95 setting will keep most of the log With the minimum 1 setting the log will be nearly cleared This parameter can also be set by using Acronis Administrative Template 48 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 3 3 Default backup and recovery options 3 3 1 Default backup options Each Acronis agent has its own default backup options Once an agent is installed the default options have pre defined values which are referred to as presets in the documentation When creating a backup plan you can either use a default option or override the default option with the custom value that will be specific for this plan only You can also customize a default option itself by changing its value against the pre defined one The new value will be used by default in all backup plans you will create later on this machine To view and change the default backup options connect the console to the managed machine and then select Options gt Default backup and recovery options gt Default backup options from the top menu Availability of the backup options The set of available backup options depends on e
287. right Acronis Inc 2000 2009 207 Backup options Configuration parameters of a backup operation p 207 such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allotted for the backup stream or data compression level Backup options are a part of a backup plan p 208 Backup plan Plan A set of rules that specify how the given data will be protected on a given machine A backup plan specifies e what data to back up e where to store the backup archive p 207 the backup archive name and location e the backup scheme p 209 that includes the backup schedule and optionally the retention rules e optionally the archive validation rules p 219 e the backup options p 207 For example a backup plan can contain the following information e back up volume C this is the data the plan will protect e name the archive MySystemVolume and place it to server backups this is the backup archive name and location e perform full backup monthly on the last day of the month at 10 00AM and incremental backup on Sundays at 10 00PM Delete backups that are older than 3 months this is a backup scheme e validate the last backup immediately after its creation this is a validation rule e protect the archive with a password this is an option Physically a backup plan is a bundle of tasks p 218 configured for execution on a managed machine p 215 A backup plan can be created directly on the machine local pl
288. rive for bootable media creation Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent for Windows tem o Minimum requirements Recommended 1 7 Technical support As part of a purchased annual Support charge you are entitled to Technical Support as follows to the extent that electronic services are available you may electronically access at no additional charge Support services for the Software which Acronis shall endeavor to make available twenty four 24 hours a day seven 7 days per week Such electronic services may include but are not limited to user forums software specific information hints and tips bug fix retrieval via the internet software maintenance and demonstration code retrieval via a WAN accessible FTP server and access to a problem resolution database via Acronis customer support system Support shall consist of supplying telephone or other electronic support to you in order to help you locate and on its own correct problems with the Software and supplying patches updates and other changes that Acronis at its sole discretion makes or adds to the Software and which Acronis makes generally available without additional charge to other licensees of the Software that are enrolled in Support Upon mutual agreement by both parties Acronis shall i supply code corrections to you to correct Software malfunctions in order to bring such Software into substantial conformity with the published operating specifications for the
289. rtualization server Otherwise the current user s documents folder This is the place where the new virtual machine will be created Whether you can change the storage on the virtualization server or not depends on the virtualization product brand and settings VMware ESX may have multiple storages A Microsoft Hyper V server enables creating a new virtual machine in any local folder Memory Initial setting if not contained in the backup the default setting of the virtualization server This is the amount of memory allocated to the new virtual machine The memory adjustment range depends on the host hardware the host operating system and the virtualization product settings For example virtual machines may be allowed to use no more than 30 of memory Disks Initial setting the number and size of the source machine s disks The number of disks is generally equal to that of the source machine but might be different if the program has to add more disks to accommodate the source machine volumes because of limitations set by the virtualization product You can add virtual disks to the machine configuration or in some cases delete the proposed disks Implementation of Xen machines is based on Microsoft Virtual PC and inherits its limitations up to 3 IDE disks with a maximum size of 127 GB and 1 processor SCSI disks are not supported Processors Initial setting if not contained in the backup or the backed up setting is not supported
290. ry The following is an explanation of the settings that are specific for the GFS backup scheme GFS related settings of the backup plan Start backup at Back up on This step creates the total backup schedule that is defines all the days you need to back up on Assume you select backing up at 8 00 PM on workdays Here is the total schedule you have defined B stands for backup Toal 3 B8B B 8 B BBB 8 B B B8B 8 B BBB schedule _ _ The total schedule Schedule Workdays at 8 00 PM Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 25 schedule schedule Weekly Monthly This step forms the daily weekly and monthly cycles in the schedule Select a day of the week from the days selected in the previous step Each 1st 2nd and 3rd backup created on this day of the week will be considered as a weekly backup Each 4th backup created on this day of the week will be considered as a monthly backup Backups created on the other days will be considered as daily backups Assume you select Friday for Weekly Monthly backup Here is the total schedule marked out according to the selection D stands for the backup that is considered Daily W stands for the backup that is considered Weekly M stands for the backup that is considered Monthly 2 oo oe fe roa Fes set su wo ruo fwe frou Fa fet su Jwe ruo Jwe fmu Pn Sat Su Mo tue wo muf Fa set Toal opno OW DDDDOW DDODDDW
291. ry point Date and time to which the backed up data can be reverted to Registered machine A machine p 215 managed by a management server p 216 A machine can be registered on only one management server at a time A machine becomes registered as a result of the registration p 217 procedure Registration A procedure that adds a managed machine p 215 to a management server p 216 Registration sets up a trust relationship between the agent p 207 residing on the machine and the server During registration the console retrieves the management server s client certificate and passes it to the agent which uses it later to authenticate clients attempting to connect This helps prevent any attempts by network attackers from establishing a fake connection on behalf of a trusted principal the management server S Selection rule A part of the backup policy p 208 Enables the management server p 216 administrator to select the data to back up within a machine Static group A group of machines which a management server p 216 administrator populates by manually adding machines to the group A machine remains in a static group until the administrator removes it from the group or from the management server Storage node Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Storage Node A server aimed to optimize usage of various resources required for protection of enterprise data This goal is achieved by organizing managed vaults p
292. ry size between the minimum and the maximum values use the slider or enter the necessary values into the special windows between the minimum and the maximum values or click on the special handle and hold and drag the borders of the disk s picture with the cursor The maximum value normally includes the most possible unallocated space But in some cases the possible unallocated space and the proposed maximum volume size might differ e g when the size of one mirror establishes the size of the other mirror or the last 8Mb of the disk space is reserved for the future conversion of the disk from basic to dynamic For basic volumes if some unallocated space is left on the disk you also will be able to choose the position of the new volume on the disk If you click the Back button you will be returned to the previous page Select destination disks p 200 If you click the Next button you will proceed to the next page Set the volume options p 201 Set the volume options On the next wizard page you can assign the volume Letter by default the first free letter of the alphabet and optionally a Label by default none Here you will also specify the File system and the Cluster size Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 201 The wizard will prompt you to choose one of the Windows file systems FAT16 disabled if the volume size has been set at more than 2 GB FAT32 disabled if the volume size has been set at more than 2 TB
293. s To remove drivers 1 Select the INF file 2 Click Remove 6 10 1 2 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x Acronis Plug in for WinPE can be added to e Windows PE 2004 1 5 Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 e Windows PE 2005 1 6 Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 To add Acronis Plug in to WinPE 1 x 1 Unpack all files of your WinPE 1 x ISO to a separate folder on the hard disk 180 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 2 Start the Bootable Media Builder either from the management console by selecting Tools gt Create Bootable Media or as a separate component 3 Select Bootable media type Windows PE o Select Use WinPE files located in the folder I specify 4 Specify path to the folder where the WinPE files are located 5 Specify the full path to the resulting ISO file including the file name 6 Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed 7 Burn the ISO to CD or DVD using a third party tool or copy to a flash drive Once a machine boots into the WinPE Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 starts automatically 6 10 1 3 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x Bootable Media Builder provides three methods of integrating Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 with WinPE 2 x e Adding the Acronis Plug in to the existing PE 2 ISO This comes in handy when you have to add the plug in to the previously configured PE 2 ISO that is already in use e Creating the PE 2 ISO with the plug i
294. s vi mnt system boot grub menu 1st 6 In the menu lst file respectively grub conf find the menu item that corresponds to the system you are recovering This menu items have the following form title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server 2 6 24 4 root hd e kernel vmlinuz 2 6 24 4 ro root dev sda2 rhgb quiet initrd initrd 2 6 24 4 img 154 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 10 11 12 13 The lines starting with title root kernel and initrd respectively determine o The title of the menu item o The device on which the Linux kernel is located typically this is the boot partition or the root partition such as root hd0 0 in this example o The path to the kernel on that device and the root partition in this example the path is vmlinuz 2 6 24 4 and the root partition is dev sda2 You can specify the root partition by label such as root LABEL identifier in the form root UUID some_uuid or device name such as root dev sda2 o The path to the initrd service on that device Edit the file mnt system etc fstab to correct the names of any devices that have changed as a result of the recovery Start the GRUB shell by running one of the following commands chroot mnt system sbin grub or chroot mnt system usr sbin grub Specify the disk on which GRUB is located typically the boot or root partition root hd Install GRUB For example to install GRUB in the master boot record
295. s 1 Enable pre post commands execution by checking the following options o Execute before the backup o Execute after the backup 2 Do any of the following o Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file o Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK Pre backup command To specify a command batch file to be executed before the backup process starts 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cleared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not back up until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the N A Perform the back fter th ck Perform the aie s palsies command is concurrently with backup only after executed despite the command the command is Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 53 successfully execution failure execution and executed Fail the or success irrespe
296. s always appears in the graphical view of the disk next to the disk s name e Online The online status means that a disk is accessible in the read write mode This is the normal disk status If you need a disk to be accessible in the read only mode select the disk and then change its status to offline by selecting Change disk status to offline from the Operations menu e Offline The offline status means that a disk is accessible in the read only mode To bring the selected offline disk back to online select Change disk status to online from the Operations menu If the disk has the offline status and the disk s name is Missing this means that the disk cannot be located or identified by the operating system It may be corrupted disconnected or powered off For information on how to bring a disk that is offline and missing back online please refer to the following Microsoft knowledge base article http technet microsoft com en us library cc732026 aspx 6 11 6 Volume operations Acronis Disk Director Lite includes the following operations that can be performed on volumes e Create Volume p 199 Creates a new volume with the help of the Create Volume Wizard e Delete Volume p 202 Deletes the selected volume e Set Active p 203 Sets the selected volume Active so that the machine will be able to boot with the OS installed there e Change Letter p 203 Changes the selected volume letter e Change Label p 204 Chan
297. s means that all backups in an archive may acquire the maximum compression as a result of repeated cleanup with consolidation Best practices Maintain the balance between the storage device capacity the restrictive parameters you set and the cleanup frequency The retention rules logic assumes that the storage device capacity is much more than the average backup size and the maximum archive size does not come close to the physical storage capacity but leaves a reasonable reserve Due to this exceeding the archive size that may occur between the cleanup task runs will not be critical for the business process The rarer the cleanup runs the more space you need to store backups that outlive their lifetime The Vaults p 80 page provides you with information about free space available in each vault Check this page from time to time If the free space which in fact is the storage device free space approaches zero you might need to toughen the restrictions for some or all archives residing in this vault 2 8 Backing up dynamic volumes Windows This section explains in brief how to back up and recover dynamic volumes p 214 using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Basic disks that use the GUID Partition Table GPT are also discussed Dynamic volume is a volume located on dynamic disks p 213 or more exactly on a disk group p 212 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 supports the following dynamic volume types RAID levels e simple spa
298. see Additional settings p 68 Workaround In case you want to keep more than one archive on the tape for example back up volume C and volume D separately choose incremental backup mode instead of a full backup when you create an initial backup of the second volume In other situations incremental backup is used for appending changes to the previously created archive You might experience short pauses that are required to rewind the tape Low quality or old tape as well as dirt on the magnetic head might lead to pauses that can last up to several minutes Limitations 1 Multiple full backups within one archive are not supported 2 Individual files cannot be recovered from a disk backup 3 Backups cannot be deleted from a tape either manually or automatically during cleanup Retention rules and backup schemes that use automatic cleanup GFS Tower of Hanoi are disabled in the GUI when backing up to a locally attached tape 4 Personal vaults cannot be created on tape devices 5 Because the presence of an operating system cannot be detected in a backup located on a tape Acronis Universal Restore p 219 is proposed at every disk or volume recovery even when recovering a Linux or non system Windows volume 6 Acronis Active Restore p 206 is not available when recovering from a tape Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 37 Recovery from a locally attached tape device Before creating a recovery task insert or mount th
299. select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Click OK 6 4 3 Backup selection To specify a backup to validate 1 Inthe upper pane select a backup by its creation date time The bottom part of the window displays the selected backup content assisting you to find the right backup 2 Click OK 6 4 4 Location selection To select a location Enter the full path to the location in the Path field or select the desired location in the folders tree e To select a centralized vault expand the Centralized group and click the appropriate vault 158 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 e To select a personal vault expand the Personal group and click the appropriate vault e To select a local folder CD DVD drive or locally attached tape device expand the Local folders group and click the required folder e To select a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them e To select FTP or SFTP server expand the corresponding group and click the appropriate folder on the server According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through
300. set up its settings e Outgoing mail server SMTP enter the name of the SMTP server e Port set the port of the SMTP server By default the port is set to 25 e User name enter the user name e Password enter the password Click Send test e mail message to check if the settings are correct Messenger service WinPopup This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under bootable media The option enables you to receive WinPopup notifications about about the recovery task s successful completion failure or need for interaction The preset is Disabled Before configuring WinPopup notifications make sure the Messenger service is started on both the machine executing the task and the machine that will receive messages The Messenger service is not started by default in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 family Change the service Startup mode to Automatic and start the service To configure WinPopup notifications 1 Select the Send WinPopup notifications check box 2 In the Machine name field enter the name of the machine to which notifications will be sent Multiple names are not supported 3 Under Send notifications select the appropriate check boxes as follows o When recovery completes successfully to send notification when the recovery task has completed successfully o When recovery fails to send notification when the recovery task
301. sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer If the archive is stored on a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device 2 In the table to the right of the tree select the archive The table displays the names of the archives contained in each vault folder you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Click OK Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 161 6 5 2 Backup selection To select a backup 1 Select one of the backups by its creation date time 2 To assist you with choosing the right backup the bottom table displays the volumes contained in the selected backup To obtain information on a volume right cl
302. sible choose the As is method to clone the disk Selecting source and target disks The program displays a list of partitioned disks and asks the user to select the source disk from which data will be transferred to another disk The next step is selection of a disk as target for the cloning operation The program enables the user to select a disk if its size will be sufficient to hold all the data from the source disk without any loss If there is some data on the disk that was chosen as the target the user will receive a warning The selected target disk is not empty The data on its volumes will be overwritten meaning that all the data currently located on the chosen target disk will be lost irrevocably Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 193 Cloning method and advanced options The Clone basic disk operation usually means that the information from the source disk is transferred to the target As is So if the destination disk is the same size and even if it is larger it is possible to transfer all the information there exactly as it is stored at the source But with the wide range of available hardware it is normal that the target disk would differ in size from the source If the destination is larger then it would be advisable to resize the source disk volumes to avoid leaving unallocated space on the target disk by selecting the Proportionally resize volumes option The option to Clone basic disk as is remains
303. sicsccccdesdecsssssessvonssensedssdessebnsscesscesesosnosssenseesees 101 Administering a managed machine ccccccccccsssssssecececessesscneseeeescesseseaeeeeeessessnsnaaeeeeess 101 Dashboard An manran naaa n r A EE EE A a AR Back pplans anditaskS inertea aeea ae re aE irae LOB ae a a a ae awa ee a a aa hee ae Creating a backup plan Why is the program asking for the password ccscescssessesssssescssesscseessessesessescesecsesseseesaeesecsessceneesenees 119 Ba ck p plan scr dentialS zron e e a E a a lens 119 SOUPGO TY PO AAEE E E EEE 120 Items to back Updo nrnerariinreonienia ra ia a a i i ER R T ER 120 Access credentials forsource zorni ie i na iaaa anid Load ens A ee 121 EXCIUSIONS ssexvesisesctccvesscavctshtesasdesexecesnh daeucusdeaventshducesncstdvasvassouwssuestxstpraateissertuaasiceussadtoveasta S 122 VARE EE EEE A A T E E 123 Access credentials for archive location c cscssscessecssessssesseseeesesceeesesesseseeeeseeeeaeeesseesaeeeaesesesaeeeeseeeeaes 124 BaCkUp SCHEMES sennie a a a a a een iiunitwntns 125 Archive validations niesen onteien eE EEE EEEE EEEE E ER a E 135 Setting up regular conversion to a virtual machine s ssssssssssssssssssesesesesesesrsrsrereresrsesrsrenenesesesesrasesen 135 Recovering data Task credentials AFEHIVE SELECTION aasa a a E ace hea a T UN Tiel a te 140 Datalst yD OAA AEAEE E TAA 140 Eaa ee Te T a EEEE E E teed decades E T T ATS 141 Access credentials for locatioM nas
304. size only As soon as the management server administrator creates a centralized vault the vault name and path to the vault are distributed to all machines registered p 217 on the server The shortcut to the vault appears on the machines in the Centralized vaults list Any backup plan p 208 existing on the machines including local plans can use the centralized vault 210 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 On a machine that is not registered on the management server a user having the privilege to back up to the centralized vault can do so by specifying the full path to the vault If the vault is managed the user s archives will be managed by the storage node as well as other archives stored in the vault Cleanup Deleting backups p 207 from a backup archive p 207 in order to get rid of outdated backups or prevent the archive from exceeding the desired size Cleanup consists in applying to an archive the retention rules set by the backup plan p 208 that produces the archive This operation checks if the archive has exceeded its maximum size and or for expired backups This may or may not result in deleting backups depending on whether the retention rules are violated or not For more information please refer to Retention rules p 31 Console Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Console A tool for remote or local access to Acronis agents p 207 and Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server p 216
305. sk or a backup plan or backup policy Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Connected to This Machine Local Connection A xX B Oop co p Create backup plan Create a backup pin to protect data on this machine General Plan name Plan s credentiais Comments _What to back up Source type Items to back up Archive Access credentials Archive comments 0 Backup 4 9 2009 4 31 48 AM Run as Administrator orrent user Some additional infromaton on the backup plan being cerated Disks volumes v 13 99 GB Al 2 volumes NTFS C New Volume E Admristrator plan s credentials Action page Create backup plan Using controls and specifying settings The action pages offer two ways of representation basic and advanced The basic representation hides such fields as credentials comments etc When the advanced representation is enabled all the available fields are displayed You can switch between the views by selecting the Advanced view check box at the top of the action page Most settings are configured by clicking the respective Change links to the right Others are selected from the drop down list or typed manually in the page s fields Plan name _ 12 Plan s credentials L Comments Backup 2 25 2009 7 41 21 AM Run as Administrator current user Change gt Action page Controls Copyright Acronis In
306. sk to dynamic 1 Select the basic disk to convert to dynamic 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Convert to dynamic in the context menu You will receive a final warning about the basic disk being converted to dynamic 3 If you click OK in this warning window the conversion will be performed immediately and if necessary your machine will be restarted Please note A dynamic disk occupies the last megabyte of the physical disk to store the database including the four level description Volume Component Partition Disk for each dynamic volume If during the conversion to dynamic it turns out that the basic disk is full and the size of its volumes cannot be decreased automatically the basic disk to dynamic conversion operation will fail 196 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Should you decide to revert your dynamic disks back to basic ones e g if you want to start using an OS on your machine that does not support dynamic disks you can convert your disks using the same menu items though the operation now will be named Convert to basic System disk conversion Acronis Disk Director Lite does not require an operating system reboot after basic to dynamic conversion of the disk if 1 There is a single Windows 2008 Vista operating system installed on the disk 2 The machine runs this operating system Basic to dynamic conversion of the disk comprising of system volumes takes a certain amount of time and any
307. sks are idle Backup plan statuses A backup plan can have one of the following statuses Error Warning OK A backup plan status is derived from the results of the last run of the plans tasks state How it is determined How to handle 1 At least one task has failed Otherwise see 2 104 Identify the failed tasks gt Check the tasks log to find out the reason of the failure then do one or more of the following e Remove the reason of the failure gt optionally Start the failed task manually e Edit the local plan to prevent its future failure in case a local plan has failed e Edit the backup policy on the management server in case a centralized plan has failed When creating a backup plan or policy the administrator can turn on the option to stop executing the backup plan as soon as the backup plan gets the Error status The backup plan s execution can be resumed using the Restart button Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 At least one task has View the log to read the warnings gt optionally Perform succeeded with actions to prevent the future warnings or failure warnings Otherwise see 3 All the tasks are No action is required Note that a backup plan can be OK in completed successfully case none of the tasks has been started yet or some of the tasks are stopped or being stopped These situations are considered as normal Task states A task can be in one of the following stat
308. splays the same tab as for the vaults view but with check boxes for each archive and backup The archive or backup you have chosen to delete has the check mark Review the archive or backup that you have selected to delete If you need to delete other archives and backups select the respective check boxes then click Delete selected and confirm the deletion The filters in this window are from the archives list of the vault view Thus if some filters have been applied to the archives list only the archives and backups corresponding to these filters are displayed here To see all content clean all the filter fields What happens if delete a backup that is a base of an incremental or differential backup To preserve archive consistency the program will consolidate the two backups For example you delete a full backup but retain the next incremental one The backups will be combined into a single full backup which will be dated the incremental backup date When you delete an incremental or differential backup from the middle of the chain the resulting backup type will be incremental Please be aware that consolidation is just a method of deletion but not an alternative to deletion The resulting backup will not contain data that was present in the deleted backup and was absent from the retained incremental or differential backup There should be enough space in the vault for temporary files created during consolidation Backups resulting from c
309. ssceesoeesessussessseesaeeess 81 Actions on persorial Vaults ivsccccessecsceevsxcaatecdescucstla sieges teucovehea a E h 82 Common operations Operations with archives stored in a vault Op rations With Dacks nann n a n e cdasonddaauceatos eseasavacddshacehavidatesess 85 Deleting archives and backups cccccsccscssesscsscsssssssssscssceecessssssssesscsscsecsessecsessessessecseseseeseeseesaesaeeasessesees 86 Filtering and sorting archive Sitisssse narhni a a a a a e i OE ea 86 SCHEGUIING iss cincsccccssccucedcscecccsdescaneccodeccdssdinsnscoececendedecsestobessenssdaasesobecsesssdeasosscenness 87 Daily SCHEGUICiscccic t aventeccstvel detain tetass a a a eeet eh Pads Eeticden a adair eden ts 88 Weekly schedul vwts 2 ac timc ativan eet ara eck ee ee 90 Monthly schedules ols weer ela oA ie ta ee EER 92 At Windows Event Log event ccccccccccssssssececececessesssaeseeeescesseseuaeseeeeesessesaaaeeeeeessessesaaeess 95 CONITIONS A easiness REAR A BRA RNA 97 Foye arene peers eo OP pe Tere ee pee eS 97 Locations host is available ciccsd id syceceesidescuceapveadsccdesondeasescpeasdesstensedcsdhadesdasetsdsdehccndedssadeariedcasdeisaesseee d 98 Fits ties MteN Val seccsecvescescnvcsesssdeddeseveav eed adhe dgcatecoetieivcavsadicateetese nertescsecascevenetieiatalecetereted he E TE 98 SIAE Kon AE A E E E A AEAEE AEEA S E EEES 99 Tme since last DACKU D RR E Er ET a Ea Ea E Aa Tan 100 Direct m nagement iscssiccsescccssescsn
310. sssssscsscsecsesssssssscsscssceessessecsessessessseseseseessessesaesaeeassesers 175 Connecting to a machine booted from media eesssssssesesesesesesesssreresesssssrsrssesesesrsrsrsrsrersrsrsrerenesesese 183 Working under bootable media cccessssssesssssescssesscecssssesssssessesscsessessessessessessceceessesaessesaucaeeseeeaess 183 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media snsesnsesnsesessssssseesesesesee 185 Recovering MD devices and logical VOIUMES ccccscssesscsssssssessssscsscsscessessesscesessesecsessessessecsesseseseeeets Disk Management 2 02 0 eh athe et eestor A et eee ee MR BASIC PrECAUTIOINS see sic ssccrnassidocsile ebsaced S E Seve classe tea seades S A ATER Running Acronis Disk Director Lite Choosing the operating system for disk management Disk management Vie Wessie rereana e ea E E E EARE A EEEE a EE E E aeei DISK ODER AtIONS EARE E A EA E E E A E OTE VOIUIME operations Tvisnnin nna a a e a Pending operations areeeirtiree e E A a E a E A Collecting system information ccccccccccecessesecsececccscessesssaeeececsscesesasaeeeeecessessaeaeeeeeens E E E E E A E N 206 E EAE IEO ETE E EESE 221 1 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 1 1 Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 overview Based on Acronis patented disk imaging and bare metal restore technologies Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 succeeds Acronis True Image Echo as the next genera
311. stalled on the host The resulting virtual machine type and location depend on the agent that resides on the selected host e Agent for Windows is installed on the host You have a choice of virtual machine types VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC or Parallels Workstation Files of the new virtual machine will be placed in the folder you select e Agent for ESX ESXi is installed on the host A VMware virtual machine will be created on the ESX ESXi server Virtual machines resulting from backup are not supposed to be backed up and so do not appear on the management server unless its integration with VMware vCenter Server is enabled If the integration is enabled such machines appear as unmanageable A backup policy cannot be applied to them e Agent for Hyper V is installed on the host You can choose between creating a virtual machine on the Hyper V server and creating a VMware Workstation Microsoft Virtual PC or Parallels Workstation machine in the folder you select Virtual machines created on the Hyper V server as a result of backup will not appear on the management server because such machines are not supposed to be backed up What is the host s processing power The conversion task will be created on the machine being backed up and will use this machine s date and time In fact the task will be executed by the host that you select and so will take that host s CPU resource If multiple backup plans use the same host multipl
312. systems and other proprietary data formats 3 Click OK 120 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 What does a disk or volume backup store For supported file systems with the sector by sector option turned off a disk or volume backup stores only those sectors that contain data This reduces the resulting backup size and speeds up the backup and recovery operations Windows The swap file pagefile sys and the file that keeps the RAM content when the machine goes into hibernation hiberfil sys are not backed up After recovery the files will be re created in the appropriate place with the zero size A volume backup stores all other files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes including hidden and system files the boot record the file allocation table FAT if it exists the root and the zero track of the hard disk with the master boot record MBR The boot code of GPT volumes is not backed up A disk backup stores all volumes of the selected disk including hidden volumes such as the vendor s maintenance partitions and the zero track with the master boot record Linux A volume backup stores all files and folders of the selected volume independent of their attributes a boot record and the file system super block A disk backup stores all disk volumes as well as the zero track with the master boot record 6 2 4 2 Selecting files and folders To select files and or folders for backing up 1 E
313. t Backup gt Pre backup Pre data Data Post data Post backup command capture apture capture command command command If the Volume Shadow Copy Service p 57 option is enabled the commands execution and the Microsoft VSS actions will be sequenced as follows Before data capture commands gt VSS Suspend gt Data capture gt VSS Resume gt After data capture commands Using the pre post data capture commands you can suspend and resume a database or application that is not compatible with VSS As opposed to the Pre Post commands p 52 the pre post data capture commands will be executed before and after the data capture process which takes seconds while the entire backup procedure may take much longer depending on the amount of data to be backed up Therefore the database or application idle time will be minimal 54 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 To specify pre post data capture commands 1 Enable pre post data capture commands execution by checking the following options o Execute before the data capture o Execute after the data capture 2 Do any of the following o Click Edit to specify a new command or a batch file o Select the existing command or the batch file from the drop down list 3 Click OK Pre data capture command To specify a command batch file to be executed before data capture 1 In the Command field type a command or bro
314. t Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Grandfather Father Son scheme 126 H Hardware requirements 16 HDD writing speed 50 59 How to convert a disk backup to a virtual machine 151 How to create bootable media 175 181 How to reactivate GRUB and change its configuration 154 l Image 215 Increasing Acronis Secure Zone 172 Incremental backup 207 209 211 215 Introducing Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 6 Items to back up 117 120 K Kernel parameters 176 177 L Linux based bootable media 175 176 184 List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media 185 189 Local backup plan 38 212 215 Local task 212 215 Location selection 157 158 165 168 Location s host is available 98 Log 107 114 Log cleanup rules 48 Log entry details e 114 116 M Machine 207 208 209 210 212 213 215 216 217 218 220 Machine options 46 62 76 77 Main area views and action pages 8 11 Managed machine 7 17 45 206 208 210 212 215 217 218 223 Managed vault 211 214 216 217 218 219 Management Console 15 Management server Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server 7 45 208 209 210 211 212 213 216 217 Managing Acronis Secure Zone 172 Managing mounted images 163 MBR destination 144 145 Media builder 102 216 Media components 50 64 Merging and moving personal vaults
315. t for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct 72 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Check box Selection Fail the task if the command Selected Cleared Selected Cleared execution fails Do not recover until the Selected Selected Cleared Cleared command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the N A Perform the recovery after recover Perform the recovery Y Y the command is concurrently only after the executed despite with the command is execution failure command successfully or success execution and executed Fail the task if the command execution failed irrespective of the command execution result Post recovery command To specify a command executable file to be executed after the recovery is completed 1 Inthe Command field type a command or browse to a batch file 2 In the Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command execution arguments if required 4 If successful execution of the command is critical for you select the Fail the task if the com
316. t nor extra size Spanned Volume A volume created from free disk space virtually linked together by the LDM from several physical disks Up to 32 disks can be included into one volume thus overcoming the hardware size limitations but if at least one disk fails all data will be lost and no part of a spanned volume may be removed without destroying the entire volume So a spanned volume provides no additional reliability nor a better I O rate Striped Volume A volume also sometimes called RAID 0 consisting of equal sized stripes of data written across each disk in the volume it means that to create a striped volume a user will need two or more dynamic disks The disks in a striped volume don t have to be identical but there must be unused space available on each disk that you want to include in the volume and the size of the volume will depend on the size of the smallest space Access to the data on a striped volume is usually faster than access to the same data on a single physical disk because the I O is spread across more than one disk Striped volumes are created for improved performance not for their better reliability they do not contain redundant information Mirrored Volume A fault tolerant volume also sometimes called RAID 1 whose data is duplicated on two identical physical disks All of the data on one disk is copied to another disk to provide data redundancy Almost any volume can be mirrored including the syst
317. t can log on the system Personal vaults can be used by local backup plans or local tasks Centralized backup plans cannot use personal vaults except for Acronis Secure Zone Sharing a personal vault Multiple machines can refer to the same physical location say to the same shared folder but each of the machines has its own shortcut in the Vaults tree Users that back up to a shared folder can see and manage each other s archives according to their access permissions for that folder To ease archive identification the Personal vault view has the Owner column that displays the owner of each archive To find out more about the owner concept see Owners and credentials p 23 Metadata The meta folder is created during backup in every personal vault This folder contains additional information about archives and backups stored in the vault such as archive owners or the machine name If you accidentally delete the meta folder it will be automatically recreated next time you access the vault But some information like owner names and machine names may be lost 4 1 1 Working with the Personal vault view This section briefly describes the main elements of the Personal vault view and suggests the ways to work with them Vault toolbar The toolbar contains operational buttons that let you perform operations with the selected personal vault See the Actions on personal vaults p 82 section for details Pie chart with legend The p
318. t log entries Display log entries for a given time period Filter log entries by type Filter log entries by the original backup plan or managed entity type Filter log entries by task managed entity machine code owner Sort log entries by date and time Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 1 Inthe From field select the date starting from which to display the log entries 2 Inthe To field select the date up to which to display the log entries Press or release the following toolbar buttons x to filter error messages A to filter warning messages to filter information messages Under the Backup plan or Managed entity type column header select the backup plan or the type of managed entity from the list Type the required value task name machine name owner name etc in the field below the respective column header As a result you will see that the list of log entries fully or just partly coincide with the entered value Click the column s header to sort the log entries in ascending order Click it once again to sort the log entries in descending order 115 Configuring the log table By default the table has seven columns that are displayed others are hidden If required you can hide the shown columns and show the hidden ones To show or hide columns 1 Right click any column header to open the context menu The menu items that are ticked off correspond to column headers presented in the ta
319. table media between the Windows style and the Linux style by selecting Tools gt Change volume representation 5 There is no Navigation tree in the media GUI Use the Navigation menu item to navigate between views 6 Tasks cannot be scheduled in fact tasks are not created at all If you need to repeat the operation configure it from scratch 7 The log lifetime is limited to the current session You can save the entire log or the filtered log entries to a file 8 Centralized vaults are not displayed in the folder tree of the Archive window To access a managed vault type the following string in the Path field bsp node_address vault_name To access an unmanaged centralized vault type the full path to the vault s folder After entering access credentials you will see a list of archives located in the vault Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 183 6 10 3 1 Setting up a display mode For a machine booted from media a display video mode is detected automatically based on the hardware configuration monitor and graphics card specifications If for some reason the video mode is detected incorrectly do the following 1 Inthe boot menu press F11 2 Add to the command prompt the following command vga ask and then proceed with booting 3 From the list of supported video modes choose the appropriate one by typing its number for example 318 and then press ENTER If you do not wish to follow this procedure every time
320. tar e aa e E a EEE T E AA 141 Destination EECA e E a A a E a aa Ae e ASF 142 Access credentials for destination cccccscssesssscsscssesscsssssesssssssesscsscsessessesssssesecseseeseeeseseessesaseaseeeeseess 149 When tO TECOVER anionen a a a a a a a i area 150 Universal Restr o T nara n coseuestiudetessecnbendibancusdedottan dutyointend oakounlvadetecden bitin vetennlys 150 How to convert a disk backup to a virtual machine s ssesesssssssesesesesesesrsssreisesesssreresesesesesrsraneesesrsrsre 151 Bootability troubleshooting ccccsccsccscssesscsssseesesscsscsscsecsesssssecsesssssesecsessessessessssassseseseeseesaesaesaesasaesers 153 Validating vaults archives and backupS s sesssssssesesesrsssssesereesrsssssserersnssssesereesessssesee 156 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 6 5 4 6 6 6 7 6 7 1 6 7 2 6 7 3 6 7 4 6 7 5 6 7 6 6 8 6 8 1 6 8 2 6 9 6 10 6 10 1 6 10 2 6 10 3 6 10 4 6 10 5 6 11 6 11 1 6 11 2 6 11 3 6 11 4 6 11 5 6 11 6 6 11 7 6 12 Task cred nitialS minnn a a eE dees a a RoBve decved oa beac E EEE AEA 157 K E Eeo aE E EN EEE E EA EA A 157 Back up selections oenen a a aae a e e a E O E E Rea 158 LOCATION selectionner EE A AEN ERNEA E RE ET NEE 158 Access credentials for SOUrCE ccccsccscsscssesssssesessesscssesecsesssssscssssesseesssessessessussessusacesoeseesaessesaueaseeeeeenees 159 When tO Va
321. tart the new virtual machine automatically after the recovery is completed This option is available only when the new machine is created on a virtualization server Click OK If the recovery task is scheduled for the future specify the credentials under which the task will run You will be taken to the Backup plans and tasks view where you can examine the state and progress of the recovery task 152 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 6 3 11 Bootability troubleshooting If a system was bootable at the time of backup you expect that it will boot after recovery However the information the operating system stores and uses for booting up may become outdated during recovery especially if you change volume sizes locations or destination drives Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 automatically updates Windows loaders after recovery Other loaders might also be fixed but there are cases when you have to re activate the loaders Specifically when you recover Linux volumes it is sometimes necessary to apply fixes or make booting changes so that Linux can boot and load correctly Below is a summary of typical situations that require additional user actions Why a recovered operating system may be unbootable e The machine BIOS is configured to boot from another HDD Solution Configure the BIOS to boot from the HDD where the operating system resides e The system was recovered on dissimilar hardware and the new hardware is incompatible wit
322. te the entire archive p 207 or the latest backup in the archive Vault A place for storing backup archives p 207 A vault can be organized on a local or networked drive or detachable media such as an external USB drive There are no settings for limiting a vault size or the number of backups in a vault You can limit the size of each archive using cleanup p 211 but the total size of archives stored in the vault is limited by the storage size only Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 219 Virtual machine On Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server a machine p 215 is considered virtual if it can be backed up from the virtualization host without installing an agent p 207 on the machine A virtual machine appears on the management server after registration of the virtualization server that hosts the machine provided that Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent for virtual machines is installed on that server W WinPE Windows Preinstallation Environment A minimal Windows system based on any of the following kernels e Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 2 PE 1 5 e Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 PE 1 6 e Windows Vista PE 2 0 e Windows Vista SP1 and Windows Server 2008 PE 2 1 WinPE is commonly used by OEMs and corporations for deployment test diagnostic and system repair purposes A machine can be booted into WinPE via PXE CD ROM USB flash drive or hard disk The Acronis Plug in fo
323. tems The operations can be configured and controlled either locally or remotely using the management console PE based bootable media PE based bootable media contains a minimal Windows system called Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE and Acronis Plug in for WinPE that is a modification of Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent that can run in the preinstallation environment WinPE proved to be the most convenient bootable solution in large environments with heterogeneous hardware Advantages e Using Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in Windows Preinstallation Environment provides more functionality than using Linux based bootable media Having booted PC compatible hardware into WinPE you can use not only Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent but also PE commands and scripts and other plug ins you ve added to the PE 174 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 e PE based bootable media helps overcome some Linux related bootable media issues such as support for certain RAID controllers or certain levels of RAID arrays only Media based on PE 2 x that is Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 kernel allows for dynamic loading of the necessary device drivers 6 10 1 How to create bootable media To enable creating physical media the machine must have a CD DVD recording drive or allow a flash drive to be attached To enable PXE or WDS RIS configuration the machine must have a network connection Bootable Media Builder can also
324. ter taking the snapshot to ensure that the data is being backed up in a consistent state For instance specify pre data capture commands that will suspend the database and flush all caches to ensure that all transactions are completed and specify post data capture commands that will resume the database operations after the snapshot is taken Volume shadow copy writers Before backing up the data of VSS aware applications make sure that the volume shadow copy writers for those applications are turned on by examining the list of writers that are present in the operating system To view this list run the following command Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 57 vssadmin list writers Note In Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 the writer for Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 is turned off by default For instructions on how to turn it on see the corresponding Microsoft Help and Support article http support microsoft com kb 838183 en 3 3 1 8 Compression level This option is effective for Windows and Linux operating systems and bootable media The option defines the level of compression applied to the data being backed up The preset is Normal The optimal data compression level depends on the type of data being backed up For example even maximum compression will not significantly reduce the archive size if the archive contains essentially compressed files such as jpg pdf or mp3 However formats such as doc or xls wi
325. th to the location where the backup archive will be stored and the archive name It is advisable that the archive name be unique within the location The default archive name is Archive N where N is the sequence number of the archive in the location you have selected Access credentials p 124 Optional Provide credentials for the location if the plan account does not have access permissions to the location To access this option select the Advanced view check box Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 117 Archive comments Optional Enter comments on the archive To access this option select the Advanced view check box How to back up Backup scheme p 125 Specify when and how often to back up your data define for how long to keep the created backup archives in the selected location set up schedule for the archive cleanup procedure Use well known optimized backup schemes such as Grandfather Father Son and Tower of Hanoi create a custom backup scheme or back up data once Archive validation When to validate p 135 Optional Define when and how often to perform validation and whether to validate the entire archive or the latest backup in the archive Backup options Settings Optional Configure parameters of the backup operation such as pre post backup commands maximum network bandwidth allocated for the backup stream or the backup archive compression level If you do nothing in this section the default values
326. the Personal vaults group and click the vault e To export data to a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder e To export data to a network share expand the Network folders group select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted ona mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself e To export data to an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer e To export data to a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the require
327. the time interval and the number of attempts The attempts will be stopped as soon as the operation succeeds OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first For example if the network location becomes unavailable or not reachable the program will attempt to reach the location every 30 seconds but no more than 5 times The attempts will be stopped as soon as the connection is resumed OR the specified number of attempts is performed depending on which comes first Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 77 Ce ae Additional settings Specify the additional settings for the recovery operation by selecting or clearing the following check boxes Set current date and time for recovered files This option is effective only when recovering files The preset is Enabled This option defines whether to recover the files date and time from the archive or assign the files the current date and time Validate backup before recovery The preset is Disabled This option defines whether to validate a backup to ensure that the backup is not corrupted before data is recovered from it Check file system after recovery This option is effective only when recovering disks or volumes When operating under bootable media this option is not effective for the NTFS file system The preset is Disabled This option defines whether to check the integrity of the file system after a disk or volume recovery Restart machi
328. ther an add on is installed on the machine where the media builder is working Console The console provides Graphical User Interface and remote connection to the agents and other Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 components 1 3 1 Agent for Windows This agent enables disk level and file level data protection under Windows Disk backup Disk level data protection is based on backing up either a disk or a volume file system as a whole along with all the information necessary for the operating system to boot or all the disk sectors using the sector by sector approach raw mode A backup that contains a copy of a disk or a volume ina packaged form is called a disk volume backup or a disk volume image It is possible to recover disks or volumes as a whole from such backup as well as individual folders or files Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 13 File backup File level data protection is based on backing up files and folders residing on the machine where the agent is installed or on a network share Files can be recovered to their original location or to another place It is possible to recover all files and folders that were backed up or select which of them to recover Other operations Conversion to a virtual machine Rather than converting a disk backup to a virtual disk file which requires additional operations to bring the virtual disk into use Agent for Windows performs the conversion by recovering a disk backup to a
329. this mode the program assumes that the backup content will be modified and creates an incremental backup to capture the changes o Assign letter in Windows Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 will assign an unused letter to the mounted volume If required select another letter to assign from the drop down list o Mount point in Linux specify the directory where you want the volume to be mounted 3 If several volumes are selected for mounting click on every volume to set its mounting parameters described in the previous step 162 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 4 Click OK 6 6 Managing mounted images Once a volume is mounted you can browse files and folders contained in the backup using a file manager and copy the desired files to any destination Thus if you need to take out only a few files and folders from a volume backup you do not have to perform the recovery procedure Exploring images Exploring mounted volumes lets you view and modify if mounted in the read write mode the volume s content To explore a mounted volume select it in the table and click Explore The default file manager window opens allowing the user to examine the mounted volume contents Unmounting images Maintaining the mounted volumes takes considerable system resources It is recommended that you unmount the volumes after the necessary operations are completed If not unmounted manually a volume will remain mounted until the opera
330. ting system restarts To unmount an image select it in the table and click 2 Unmount To unmount all the mounted volumes click 2 Unmount all 6 7 Exporting archives and backups The export operation creates a copy of an archive or a self sufficient part copy of an archive in the location you specify The original archive remains untouched The export operation can be applied to e a single archive an exact archive copy will be created e a single backup an archive consisting of a single full backup will be created The export of an incremental or a differential backup is performed using consolidation of the preceding backups up to the nearest full backup e your choice of backups belonging to the same archive the resulting archive will contain only the specified backups Consolidation is performed as required so the resulting archive may contain full incremental and differential backups Usage scenarios Export enables you to separate a specific backup from a chain of incremental backups for fast recovery writing onto removable or detachable media or other purposes By exporting a managed vault to a detachable media you obtain a portable unmanaged vault that can be used in the following scenarios e keeping an off site copy of your vault or of the most important archives e physical transportation of a vault to a distant branch office Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 163 e recovery without access to the storage
331. tion Standard AES When the encryption option and a password for the archive are set in the backup options p 207 each backup belonging to the archive is encrypted by the agent p 207 before saving the backup to its destination The AES cryptographic algorithm operates in the Cipher block chaining CBC mode and uses a randomly generated key with a user defined size of 128 192 or 256 bits The encryption key is then encrypted with AES 256 using a SHA 256 hash of the password as a key The password itself is not stored anywhere on the disk or in the backup file the password hash is used for verification purposes With this two level security the backup data is protected from any unauthorized access but recovering a lost password is not possible Encrypted vault A managed vault p 215 to which anything written is encrypted and anything read is decrypted transparently by the storage node p 217 using a vault specific encryption key stored on the node In case the storage medium is stolen or accessed by an unauthorized person the malefactor will not be able to decrypt the vault contents without access to the storage node Encrypted archives p 214 will be encrypted over the encryption performed by the agent p 207 Export An operation that creates a copy of an archive p 207 or a self sufficient part copy of an archive in the location you specify The export operation can be applied to a single archive a single backup p 207
332. tion disaster recovery solution Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Workstation inherits the benefits of the Acronis True Image Echo product family e Backup of an entire disk or volume including the operating system all applications and data e Bare metal recovery to any hardware e File and folder backup and recovery Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Workstation offers new benefits that help organizations meet challenging Recovery Time Objectives while reducing both capital expense and software maintenance costs e Leveraging existing IT infrastructure Backward compatibility and an easy upgrade from Acronis True Image Echo e Highly automated data protection All round planning of data protection backup retention and validation of backups within a backup policy Built in Tower of Hanoi and Grandfather Father Son backup schemes with customizable parameters A variety of events and conditions can be chosen to trigger a backup e Easy work with virtual environments Conversion of a backup to a fully configured VMware Microsoft Parallels or Citrix virtual machine e Redesigned GUI Dashboard for quick operational decision making Overview of all configured and running operations with color coding for successful and failed operations e Enterprise level of security Controlling user rights to perform operations and access backups Running services with minimal user rights 1 2 Getting started Direct management 1 Install Acro
333. to set the new volume as active To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 205 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them The new volume structure will be graphically represented in the Disk management view immediately 6 11 6 4 Change volume letter Windows operating systems assign letters C D etc to hard disk volumes at startup These letters are used by applications and operating systems to locate files and folders in the volumes Connecting an additional disk as well as creating or deleting a volume on existing disks might change your system configuration As a result some applications might stop working normally or user files might not be automatically found and opened To prevent this you can manually change the letters that are automatically assigned to the volumes by the operating system If you need to change a letter assigned to a volume by the operating system 1 Select a volume to change a letter 2 Right click on the selected volume and then click Change letter in the context menu 3 Select a new letter in the Change Letter window 4 By clicking OK in the Change Letter window you ll add a pending operation to volume letter assignment To finish the added operation you will have to commit p 205 it Exiting the program without committing the pending operations will effectively cancel them Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 203
334. tual machine and then proceed as with regular disk or volume recovery Click validate The Validation p 156 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source Validation of a file backup imitates recovering of all files from the backup to a dummy destination Validation of a disk backup calculates a checksum for every data block saved in the backup Click amp Export The Export p 163 page will be opened with the pre selected backup as a source The export of a backup creates a new archive with a self sufficient copy of the backup in the location you specify Select one of the backups you want to delete then click x Delete The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 86 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be select the check boxes for the desired backups then confirm the deletion Please be aware that if filters have been applied to the vaults list you see only a part of the vault content Be sure that the vault does not contain archives you need to retain before starting the operation Click Delete all The program duplicates your selection in the Backups deletion p 86 window that has check boxes for each archive and each backup Review the selection and correct if need be then confirm the deletion Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 85 4 2 3 Deleting archives and backups The Backups deletion window di
335. twork Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server provides the administrator with e a single entry point to the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 infrastructure e an easy way to protect data on numerous machines p 215 using backup policies p 208 and grouping e enterprise wide monitoring functionality e the ability to create centralized vaults p 210 for storing enterprise backup archives p 207 e the ability to manage storage nodes p 217 If there are multiple management servers on the network they operate independently manage different machines and use different centralized vaults for storing archives Media builder A dedicated tool for creating bootable media p 209 P Personal vault A local or networked vault p 219 created using direct management p 212 Once a personal vault is created a shortcut to it appears under the Personal vaults item of the Navigation pane Multiple machines can use the same physical location for example a network share as a personal vault Physical machine On Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server a physical machine is the same as a registered machine p 217 A virtual machine is considered physical if an Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 agent is installed on the machine and the machine is registered on the management server 216 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Plan See Backup plan p 208 Policy See Backup policy p 208 R Recove
336. ude personal vaults locally attached tape devices removable media and in the advanced product versions managed and unmanaged centralized vaults When the console is connected to a management server two export methods are available e export from a managed vault The export is performed by the storage node that manages the vault The destination can be a network share or a local folder of the storage node e export from an unmanaged centralized vault The export is performed by the agent installed on the managed machine you specify The destination can be any location accessible to the agent including a managed vault Tip When configuring export to a deduplicating managed vault choose a machine where the deduplication add on to the agent is installed Otherwise the export task will fail Operations with an export task An export task starts immediately after you complete its configuration An export task can be stopped or deleted in the same way as any other task Once the export task is completed you can run it again at any time Before doing so delete the archive that resulted from the previous task run if the archive still exists in the destination vault Otherwise the task will fail You cannot edit an export task to specify another name for the destination archive this is a limitation 164 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 Tip You can implement the staging scenario manually by regularly running the archive deletion tas
337. ue names to the volumes The Linux style bootable media shows local disks and volumes as unmounted sda1 sdaz2 Volume properties Resizing and relocating When recovering a volume to a basic MBR disk you can resize and relocate the volume by dragging it or its borders with a mouse or by entering corresponding values in the appropriate fields Using this feature you can redistribute the disk space between the volumes being recovered In this case you will have to recover the volume to be reduced first Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 145 Properties Type A basic MBR disk can contain up to four primary volumes or up to three primary volumes and multiple logical drives By default the program selects the original volume s type You can change this setting if required e Primary Information about primary volumes is contained in the MBR partition table Most operating systems can boot only from the primary volume of the first hard disk but the number of primary volumes is limited If you are going to recover a system volume to a basic MBR disk select the Active check box Active volume is used for loading an operating system Choosing active for a volume without an installed operating system could prevent the machine from booting You cannot set a logical drive or dynamic volume active e Logical Information about logical volumes is located not in the MBR but in the extended partition table The number of logical volum
338. ult o Ifthe archive is stored in a local folder on the machine expand the Local folders group and click the required folder If the archive is located on removable media e g DVDs first insert the last DVD and then insert the discs in order starting from the first one when the program prompts o If the archive is stored on a network share expand the Network folders group then select the required networked machine and then click the shared folder If the network share requires access credentials the program will ask for them Note for Linux users To specify a Common Internet File System CIFS network share which is mounted ona mount point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself o Ifthe archive is stored on an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port _number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password ca
339. ults p 80 section 6 8 2 1 Increasing Acronis Secure Zone To increase Acronis Secure Zone 1 On the Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Increase 2 Select volumes from which free space will be used to increase the Acronis Secure Zone 3 Specify the new size of the zone by o dragging the slider and selecting any size between the current and maximum values The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space of all selected partitions o typing an exact value in the Acronis Secure Zone Size field When increasing the size of the zone the program will act as follows o first it will use the unallocated space Volumes will be moved if necessary but not resized Moving of locked volumes requires a reboot o If there is not enough unallocated space the program will take free space from the selected volumes proportionally reducing the volumes size Resizing of locked partitions requires a reboot Reducing a system volume to the minimum size might prevent the machine s operating system from booting 4 Click OK 6 8 2 2 Decreasing Acronis Secure Zone To decrease Acronis Secure Zone 1 Onthe Manage Acronis Secure Zone page click Decrease 2 Select volumes that will receive free space after the zone is decreased 3 Specify the new size of the zone by 172 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 o dragging the slider and selecting any size between the current and minimum values
340. unt point such as mnt share select this mount point instead of the network share itself e To back up data to an FTP or SFTP server type the server name or address in the Path field as follows ftp ftp_server port number or sftp sftp_server port number If the port number is not specified port 21 is used for FTP and port 22 is used for SFTP After entering access credentials the folders on the server become available Click the appropriate folder on the server You can access the server as an anonymous user if the server enables such access To do so click Use anonymous access instead of entering credentials According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that the user name and password can be intercepted by an eavesdropper using a packet sniffer e To back up data to a locally attached tape device expand the Tape drives group then click the required device 2 Using the archives table To assist you with choosing the right destination the table displays the names of the archives contained in each location you select While you are reviewing the location content archives can be added deleted or modified by another user or by the program itself according to scheduled operations Use the Refresh button to refresh the list of archives 3 Naming the new archive Once you select the archive destination the program generates a
341. up unallocated space When a dynamic volume is recovered to disk group unallocated space both the type and the content of the resulting volume are recovered The unallocated space size has to be enough to accommodate the backup content The way unallocated space is distributed among the disks is also important Example Striped volumes consume equal portions of space on each disk Assume you are going to recover a 30GB striped volume to a disk group consisting of two disks Each disk has volumes and a certain amount of unallocated space The total size of unallocated space is 40GB The recovery will always result in a striped volume if the unallocated space is distributed evenly among the disks 20GB and 20GB If one of the disks has 10GB and the other has 30GB of unallocated space then the recovery result depends on the size of the data being recovered 34 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 o If the data size is less than 20GB then one disk can hold say 10GB the other will hold the remaining 10GB This way a striped volume will be created on both disks and 20GB on the second disk will remain unallocated o Ifthe data size is more than 20GB the data cannot be distributed evenly between the two disks but can fit into a single simple volume A simple volume accommodating all the data will be created on the second disk The first disk will remain untouched Backed up source Recovered to Dynamic volume Basic MBR volume Basic G
342. vwr exe or select Control Panel gt Administrative tools gt Event Viewer You can filter the events to be logged You can override the settings set here exclusively for the events that occur during backup or during recovery in the Default backup and recovery options p 49 In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup 46 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific The preset is Disabled To enable this option select the Log events check box Use the Types of events to log check box to filter the events to be logged in the Application Event Log of Windows o All events all events information warnings and errors o Errors and warnings o Errors only To disable this option clear the Log events check box a 2kid SNMP notifications This option is effective for both Windows and Linux operating systems This option is not available when operating under the bootable media The option defines whether the agent s operating on the managed machine have to send the log events to the specified Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP managers You can choose the types of events to be sent You can override the settings set here e
343. way unpredictable Since each of the rules will be applied to the entire archive the backups belonging to one backup plan can be easily deleted along with the backups belonging to the other You should especially not expect the classic behavior of the GFS and Tower of Hanoi backup schemes Normally each complex backup plan should back up to its own archive 6 2 8 Access credentials for archive location Specify credentials required for access to the location where the backup archive will be stored The user whose name is specified will be considered as the archive owner To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Use the plan s credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup plan account specified in the General section o Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the plan account does not have access permissions to the location You might need to provide special credentials for a network share or a storage node vault Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username domain e Password The password for the account 2 Click OK Warning According to the original FTP specification credentials required for access to FTP servers are transferred through a network as plaintext This means that t
344. weeks to run the task on In the During the day execute the task area select one of the following Once at lt gt Set up the time at which the task will be run once Every lt gt Set up how many times the task will be run during the specified time interval For example setting the task frequency to Every 1 hour From 10 00 00 AM until 10 00 00 PM allows the task to be run 12 times from 10 AM to 10 PM during one day From lt gt Until lt gt In the Effective area set the following settings From lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be enabled an effective date If this check box is cleared the task will be started on the nearest day and time you have specified above To lt gt Set up a date when this schedule will be disabled If this check box is cleared the task will be run for an indefinite number of months Advanced scheduling settings are available only for machines registered on Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Management Server To specify these settings click Change in the Advanced settings area All the settings you made are displayed in the Result field at the bottom of the window Examples Last day of every month schedule Run the task once at 10 PM on the last day of every month The schedule s parameters are set up as follows 1 Months lt All months gt 2 Days Last The task will run on the last day of every month despite its actual date 3 Once at 10 00
345. wse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file will be executed 3 Inthe Arguments field specify the command s execution arguments if required 4 Depending on the result you want to obtain select the appropriate options as described in the table below 5 Click Test command to check if the command is correct Check box Selection Fail the backup task if the Selected Cleared Selected Cleared command execution fails Do not perform the data Selected Selected Cleared Cleared capture until the command execution is complete Result Preset Perform the data N A Perform the data capture after the capture Perform the data p p command is concurrently with capture only after executed despite the command and the command is p execution failure irrespective of the successfully or success command execution executed Fail the task if the command execution fails result Post data capture command To specify a command batch file to be executed after data capture 1 In the Command field type a command or browse to a batch file The program does not support interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause 2 Inthe Working directory field specify a path to a directory where the command batch file wil
346. xclusively for the events that occur during backup or during recovery in the Default backup and recovery options p 49 In this case the settings set here will be effective for operations other than backup and recovery such as archive validation or cleanup You can further override the settings set in the default backup and recovery options when creating a backup plan or a recovery task The settings you obtain in this case will be plan specific or task specific Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 provides the following Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP objects to SNMP management applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 1 0 string identifying the type of event Information Warning Error 1 3 6 1 4 1 24769 100 200 2 0 string containing the text description of the event it looks identical to messages published by Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 in its log The preset is Disabled To set up sending SNMP messages 1 Select the Send messages to SNMP server check box 2 Specify the appropriate options as follows o Types of events to send choose the types of events All events Errors and warnings or Errors only o Server name IP type the name or IP address of the host running the SNMP management application the messages will be sent to Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 47 o Community type the name of the SNMP community to which both the host running SNMP management application and the sending ma
347. xisting virtual machine Recovery of a disk volume backup to a new virtual machine Recovery of a virtual machine backup to an existing virtual machine Recovery of a virtual machine backup to a new virtual machine Validation of a single archive Validation of backups Validation of all archives stored in a vault Deleting backups from a backup archive in accordance with retention rules Creating Acronis Secure Zone Resizing changing password deleting Acronis Secure Zone Disk management operations Depending on the type of task and whether it is running or not a combination of the following tabs will appear Task The Task tab is common for all types of tasks It provides general information on the selected task Archive The Archive tab is available for backup archive validation and cleanup tasks Provides information on the archive its name type size where it is stored etc Backup The Backup tab is available for recovery backup validation and export tasks Provides details on the selected backup when it was created its type full incremental differential information on the archive and the vault the backup is stored in Settings The Settings tab displays information on scheduling and the options changed against the default values Progress The Progress tab is available while the task is running It is common for all types of tasks The tab provides information about task progress elapsed time and other p
348. xpand the list of disks Click OK to start the recovery For a complete list of commands and utilities that you can use in the bootable media environment see List of commands and utilities available in Linux based bootable media p 185 For detailed descriptions of the trueimagecmd and trueimagemnt utilities see the Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 command line reference Mounting backup volumes You may want to mount a volume stored in a disk backup for example to view some files in it before starting the recovery To mount a backup volume 1 Use the list command to list the volumes which are stored in the backup For example trueimagecmd list filename smb server backups linux_machine tib The output will contain lines similar to the following Num Idx Partition Flags Start Size Type Disk 1 Table 7 Table Disk 2 Table 2 Table Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 189 Dynamic amp GPT Volumes DYN1 4 my_volgroup my_logvol 12533760 Ext2 You will need the volume s index given in the Idx column in the next step 2 Use the mount command specifying the volume s index in the i parameter For example trueimagemnt mount mnt filename smb server backups linux_machine tib i 4 This command mounts the logical volume DYN1 whose index in the backup is 4 on the mount point mnt To unmount a backup volume e Use the unmount command specifying the volume s mount point as a parameter For examp
349. xpand the local folders tree items in order to view its nested folders and files 2 Select an item by checking the corresponding check box in the tree Selecting a check box for a folder means that all its content files and folders will be backed up That is also the case for new files that will appear there in the future A file based backup is not sufficient for recovery of the operating system In order to recover your operating system you have to perform a disk backup Use the table in the right part of the window to browse and select the nested items Selecting the check box beside the Name column s header automatically selects all items in the table Clearing this check box automatically deselects all items 3 Click OK 6 2 5 Access credentials for source Specify the credentials required for access to the data you are going to backup To specify credentials 1 Select one of the following o Use the plan s credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials of the backup plan account specified in the General section Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 121 o Use the following credentials The program will access the source data using the credentials you specify Use this option if the plan s account does not have access permissions to the data Specify e User name When entering the name of an Active Directory user account be sure to also specify the domain name DOMAIN Username or Username d
350. y including weekends e Beable to recover files as of any date over the past seven days e Have access to weekly backups of the past month e Keep monthly backups indefinitely Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as follows e Start backup at 11 00 PM e Back up on All days Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 127 e Weekly monthly Saturday for example e Keep backups o Daily 1 week o Weekly 1 month o Monthly indefinitely As a result an archive of daily weekly and monthly backups will be created Daily backups will be available for seven days since creation For instance a daily backup of Sunday January 1 will be available through next Sunday January 8 the first weekly backup the one of Saturday January 7 will be stored on the system until February 7 Monthly backups will never be deleted Limited storage If you do not want to arrange a vast amount of space to store a huge archive you may set up a GFS scheme so as to make your backups more short lived at the same time ensuring that your information can be recovered in case of an accidental data loss Suppose that you need to e Perform backups at the end of each working day e Be able to recover an accidentally deleted or inadvertently modified file if this has been discovered relatively quickly e Have access to a weekly backup for 10 days after it was created e Keep monthly backups for half a year Backup scheme parameters can then be set up as
351. y desired day of the week or to several days For example you need the task to be run with the following schedule e Monday twice at 12 PM noon and 9 PM e Tuesday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM e Wednesday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM e Thursday every 3 hours from 9 AM till 9 PM e Friday twice at 12 PM and 9 PM i e same as on Monday e Saturday once at 9 PM e Sunday once at 9 PM Combining the identical times the following three schedules can be added to the task First schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Mon Fri 2 Every 9 hours From 12 00 00 PM Until 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set Second schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Tue Wed Thu 2 Every 3 hours From 09 00 00 AM until 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set Third schedule 1 Every 1 week s on Sat Sun 2 Once at 09 00 00 PM 3 Effective From not set To not set 5 3 Monthly schedule Monthly schedule is effective in Windows and Linux operating systems 92 Copyright Acronis Inc 2000 2009 To specify a monthly schedule In the Schedule area select the appropriate parameter as follows Months lt gt Select a certain month s you want to run the task in Days lt gt Select specific days of the month to run the task on You can also select the last day of the month irrespective of its actual date On lt gt lt gt Select specific days of the
352. ysical media CD DVD USB drive or other media supported by a machine BIOS as a boot device that boots on any PC compatible machine and enables you to run Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Agent either in a Linux based environment or Windows Preinstallation Environment WinPE without the help of an operating system Bootable media is most often used to e recover an operating system that cannot start e access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system e deploy an operating system on bare metal e create basic or dynamic volumes on bare metal e back up sector by sector a disk with an unsupported file system e back up offline any data that cannot be backed up online because of restricted access being permanently locked by the running applications or for any other reason A machine can be booted into the above environments either with physical media or using the network boot from Acronis PXE Server Windows Deployment Services WDS or Remote Installation Services RIS These servers with uploaded bootable components can be thought of as a kind of bootable media too You can create bootable media or configure the PXE server or WDS RIS using the same wizard Linux based bootable media Linux based media contains Acronis Backup amp Recovery 10 Bootable Agent based on Linux kernel The agent can boot and perform operations on any PC compatible hardware including bare metal and machines with corrupted or non supported file sys
353. zip pktsetup uuidgen halt poweroff vconfig hexdump ps vi hotplug raidautorun zcat 6 10 5 Recovering MD devices and logical volumes To recover Linux Software RAID devices known as MD devices and or devices created by Logical Volume Manager LVM known as logical volumes you need to create the corresponding volume structure before starting the recovery You can create the volume structure in either of the following ways e Automatically in Linux based bootable media by using the management console or a script see Creating the volume structure automatically p 186 e Manually by using the lvm utility see Creating the volume structure manually p 187 6 10 5 1 Creating the volume structure automatically Suppose that you saved the volume structure to the etc Acronis directory see Backing up LVM volumes Linux and that the volume with this directory is included in the archive To recreate the volume structure in Linux based bootable media use either of the methods described below Caution As a result of the following procedures the current volume structure on the machine will be replaced with the one stored in the archive This will destroy the data that is currently stored on some or all of the machine s hard disks If disk configuration has changed An MD device or a logical volume resides on one or more disks each of its own size If you replaced any of these disks between backup and recovery or if you are recov

Acronis Backup & Recovery 10 Workstation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Acronis Backup &amp; Recovery 10 Workstation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Acronis Backup & Recovery 10 Workstation